E
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your
camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
Eyecup Eg
Battery Pack
LP-E6N
(with protective cover)
Battery Charger
LC-E6/LC-E6E*
Camera
(with body cap)
Interface Cable
IFC-150U II
Cable
protector
Wide Strap
* Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a
power cord.)
The Instruction Manual and CD-ROMs provided are listed on the next page.
Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
Connecting to Peripheral Devices
When connecting the camera to a computer or printer, use the provided
interface cable or one from Canon. When connecting an interface cable, also
use the provided cable protector (p.36).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Instruction Manual and CD-ROMs
The instruction manual consists of a booklet, a leaflet, and electronic
manuals (PDF files on the CD-ROM).
Camera Basic
Quick Reference Guide
Instruction Manual
Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM
Contains the following manuals (PDF files):
• Camera Instruction Manual (Detailed version)
• Quick Reference Guide
Instructions for viewing the Camera Instruction Manual
EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (Software CD-ROM)
Contains software such as image-editing software and
Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files).
For more information and installation procedures of the
Instructions for viewing the Software Instruction Manual
are on page 522.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Compatible Cards
The camera can use the following cards regardless of capacity: If the
card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another
CF (CompactFlash) cards
* Type I, UDMA mode 7-compatible.
SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards
* UHS-I cards supported.
Cards that Can Record Movies
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a fast reading/
writing speed as shown in the table.
Movie Recording Size
CF card
SD card
(p.297)
ALL-I (I-only)
IPB
30 MB/sec. or faster
10 MB/sec. or faster
20 MB/sec. or faster
6 MB/sec. or faster
If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may
not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card
with a slow reading speed, the movie may not play back properly.
If you want to shoot still photos while shooting a movie, you will need
an even faster card.
To check the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s Web site.
In this manual, “CF card” refers to CompactFlash cards and “SD
card” refers to SD/SDHC/SDXC cards. “Card” refers to all memory
cards used to record images or movies.
* The camera does not come with a card for recording images/
movies. Please purchase it separately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Quick Start Guide
1
The camera-front side slot is
for a CF card, and the
camera-back side slot is for
an SD card.
2
* Shooting is possible with either a CF card or an SD card in the camera.
Align it with the red dot.
3
4
5
Set the lens’s focus mode
Set the power switch to <1>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Quick Start Guide
While holding down the center
of the Mode Dial, set it to <A>
All the necessary camera settings
will be set automatically.
6
7
Look through the viewfinder and
aim the viewfinder center over the
subject.
Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus on the
subject.
Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
8
9
Review the picture.
The image just captured will be
displayed for 2 sec. on the LCD
monitor.
To display the image again, press
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View
Shooting” (p.255).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Conventions Used in this Manual
Icons in this Manual
<6>
<5>
<9>
<0>
: Indicates the Main Dial.
: Indicates the Quick Control Dial.
: Indicates the Multi-controller.
: Indicates the Setting button.
0/9/4/7/8 : Indicates that each function remains active for
4 sec., 6 sec., 8 sec., 10 sec., or 16 sec. after
you let go of the button.
* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials,
and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the
LCD monitor.
3
: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the
<M> button to change its settings.
M
: When shown on the upper right of a page, it indicates that
the function is available only in the <d>, <s>, <f>,
<a>, or <F> mode.
(p.**)
: Reference page numbers for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Troubleshooting advice.
Basic Assumptions
All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch
is set to <1> and the <R> switch is set to the left (Multi
It is assumed that all the menu settings, Custom Functions, etc. are
set to their defaults.
The illustrations in this manual show the EOS 5DS attached with the
EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens as an example.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Chapters
For first-time DSLR users, Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera’s
basic operations and shooting procedures.
Introduction
Getting Started
1
2
3
4
5
Basic Shooting
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
Image Settings
Advanced Operations
Flash Photography
6
7
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
Shooting Movies
8
9
10
12
13
14
Image Playback
Post-Processing Images
Sensor Cleaning
Printing Images and Transferring Images to a Computer
Customizing the Camera
Reference
Viewing the CD-ROM Instruction Manuals /
Downloading Images to Your Computer
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Contents
Chapters........................................................................................... 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15
Contents
Downloading Images to Your Computer
515
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
Index to Features
Power
LCD Monitor
Charging the battery
Battery level
Î p.40
Î p.48
Electronic level
Help
Battery information
check
AF
AF operation
Auto power off
Î p.69
Card
AF point selection
AF point registration
Lens group
Formatting
Recording function
Selecting card
Î p.67
AF points lighting up
Release shutter without
in red
card
Î p.44
Î p.52
AI Servo AF
characteristics
Lens
AF Custom Functions
AF Microadjustment
Focusing manually
Attaching
Basic Settings
Language
Î p.51
Î p.49
Î p.69
Metering
Date/Time/Zone
Beeper
Metering mode
Drive
Copyright information
Drive mode
Self-timer
Maximum burst
Viewfinder
Dioptric adjustment
Eyepiece cover
Grid display
Î p.54
Î p.74
Î p.76
Recording Images
Recording function
Creating/Selecting
Electronic level
a folder
File name
File numbering
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Index to Features
Image Quality
Exposure
Crop/aspect ratio
ISO speed
Exposure compensation
with M+Auto ISO
AEB
Picture Style
White balance
AE lock
Safety shift
Noise reduction for
Flash
high ISO speeds
External Speedlite
Noise reduction for long
exposures
Flash exposure
compensation
Highlight tone priority
FE lock
Lens aberration
correction
Flash Custom Function
Î p.188
Anti-flicker
Color space
settings
Live View Shooting
Live View shooting
AF method
Shooting
Shooting mode
HDR
Î p.33
Î p.219
Î p.239
Î p.61
Continuous AF
Multiple exposures
Mirror lockup
Bulb timer
Focusing manually
Crop/aspect ratio
Silent LV shooting
Interval timer
Depth-of-field preview
Remote control
Quick Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18
Index to Features
Movie Shooting
Movie shooting
AF method
Image Editing
Resizing JPEGs
Cropping JPEGs
Movie Servo AF
Printing and Transferring
Images
Sound recording
Time code
PictBridge
Time-lapse movie
Still photo shooting
Print Order (DPOF)
Image transfer
Photobook Set-up
Playback
Customization
Image review time
Single-image display
Shooting information
Index display
Î p.70
Image browsing
(Jump display)
Î p.332
Magnified view
Two-image display
Image rotation
Protect
Sensor Cleaning and Dust
Reduction
Sensor cleaning
Rating
Interface
Movie playback
Slide show
Cable protector
Software
Overview
Installation
Viewing images on a
TV set
Î p.354
Copying
Erasing
Quick Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19
Safety Precautions
The following precautions are provided to prevent harm or injury to
yourself and others. Make sure to thoroughly understand and follow
these precautions before using the product.
If you experience any malfunctions, problems, or damage to the
product, contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer
from whom you purchased the product.
Follow the warnings below. Otherwise, death or
Warnings:
serious injuries may result.
To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, explosions, and electrical shock,
follow the safeguards below:
• Do not use any batteries, power sources, or accessories not specified in the
Instruction Manual. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery. Do not apply heat or
solder to the battery. Do not expose the battery to fire or water. Do not subject the
battery to strong physical shock.
• Do not insert the battery’s plus and minus ends incorrectly.
• Do not recharge the battery in temperatures outside the allowable charging
(working) temperature range. Also, do not exceed the recharging time indicated in
the Instruction Manual.
• Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,
accessories, connecting cables, etc.
When disposing of a battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent
contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent a fire or an explosion.
If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted when recharging the battery,
immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop recharging.
Otherwise, it may cause a fire, heat damage, or electrical shock.
If the battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it
immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process. It may cause a fire,
electrical shock or skin burn if you keep using it.
Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or
clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a
physician immediately.
Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the
camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause
skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is
recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when
using the camera in very hot places.
Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle. It may cause an accident.
Do not fire the flash near a person’s eyes. It may impair the person’s vision. When
using flash to photograph an infant, keep at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20
Safety Precautions
When the camera or accessories are not in use, make sure to remove the battery
and disconnect the power plug from the equipment before storing. This is to prevent
electrical shock, excessive heat, fire, or corrosion.
Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an
explosion or a fire.
If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts,
do not touch the internal parts. There is a possibility of an electrical shock.
Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause
electrical shock.
Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or
lens. Doing so may damage your vision.
Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants, including when in use. Straps
or cords may accidentally cause choking, electrical shock, or injury. Choking or injury
may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory. If
a child or infant swallows a part or accessory, consult a physician immediately.
Do not use or store the equipment in dusty or humid places. Likewise, store the
battery with its protective cover attached to prevent short-circuit. This is to prevent a
fire, excessive heat, electrical shock, or burn.
Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.
To prevent a fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:
• Always insert the power plug all the way in.
• Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.
• When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.
• Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the
cord. Also do not twist or tie the cords.
• Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.
• Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged.
Unplug the power plug periodically and clean off the dust around the power outlet
with a dry cloth. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power
outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet, causing a fire.
Do not connect the battery directly to an electrical outlet or a car’s cigarette lighter
outlet. The battery may leak, generate excessive heat or explode, causing a fire,
burns or injuries.
A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the
product is used by children. Supervise children while they are using the product.
Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury.
Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera in the sun without the lens cap
attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.
Do not cover or wrap the product with a cloth. Doing so may trap heat within and
cause the casing to deform or catch fire.
Be careful not to get the camera wet. If you drop the product in the water or if water
or metal get inside the product, promptly remove the battery. This is to prevent a fire
and an electrical shock.
Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the product.
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
21
Safety Precautions
Follow the cautions below. Otherwise, physical injury
or property damage may result.
Cautions:
Do not use or store the product inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source.
The product may become hot and cause skin burns. Doing so may also cause
battery leakage or explosion, which will degrade the performance or shorten the life
of the product.
Do not carry the camera around when it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause
injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.
Do not leave the product in a low-temperature environment for an extended period of
time. The product will become cold and may cause injury when touched.
Never play the provided CD-ROM in a drive that is not compatible with the CD-ROM.
If you use it in a music CD player, you may damage the speakers and other
components. When using headphones, there is also a risk of injury to your ears from
excessively loud volume.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
Handling Precautions
Camera Care
This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical
shock.
The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you
accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult the nearest Canon
Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry and clean cloth. If the
camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a well-wrung wet cloth.
Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such
as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near
anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.
Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
Do not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.
Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and
focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean
the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest
Canon Service Center.
Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to
prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera
misoperation.
If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
23
Handling Precautions
If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid
damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and
battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before
using the camera.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to
check that the camera is still working.
Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and
corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is
an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera
checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the camera
yourself and make sure it is working properly.
If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or movie shooting for a
prolonged period, the camera may become hot. This is not a malfunction.
If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting
may occur.
LCD Panel and LCD Monitor
Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there may be a few dead pixels
displaying only black or red, etc. among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels.
Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.
If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.
The LCD monitor display may seem slow in low temperatures, or look black
in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24
Handling Precautions
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything
metallic.
Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.
Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field,
such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Also avoid places prone to having
static electricity.
Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
Store the card in a case.
Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Lens
After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the
lens with the rear end up and attach the rear lens cap to
avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.
Contacts
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25
Nomenclature
<o> Drive mode selection/
<n> White balance selection/
<m> Flash exposure
compensation/ISO speed
<B> AF area selection/
<U> LCD panel
illumination button
Lens mount index (p.52)
Flash sync contacts
<6> Main Dial
(p.56)
Mode Dial lock-release
Shutter button
Self-timer lamp
Built-in
microphone
Strap mount
(p.35)
Remote control
Lens release
button (p.53)
Grip
(Battery
compartment)
DC coupler cord hole
Lens lock pin
Lens mount
Depth-of-field preview button
Contacts (p.25)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26
Nomenclature
<p>
AF start button
<A> AE lock
button (p.217)
Viewfinder eyepiece
<S>
AF point
selection
button
<B> Info button
Power switch (p.47)
<Q> Quick
Control
button (p.61)
<M>
Menu button (p.64)
Terminal cover
<5> Quick
Control Dial (p.57)
<0> Setting button
Cable protector socket
Cable protector socket
When connecting the interface cable to a digital terminal, you must use the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
27
Nomenclature
<V> Focal plane mark
<A/k> Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch
<0> Start/Stop button
<b/X>
Creative Photo/
Comparative playback
(Two-image display)
<9> Multi-controller
<c>
Rating button
Strap mount
<u>
Index/Magnify/
Reduce button
Card slot
<x> Playback
<L> Erase button
Battery
(p.358)
compartment
cover release
Speaker
Ambient light sensor
Battery compartment
cover (p.42)
Access lamp (p.45)
Serial number
Tripod socket
Multi function lock switch (p.59)
SD card slot (p.43)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28
Nomenclature
LCD Panel
Shutter speed
Aperture
FE lock (FEL)
Remaining number of
exposures for time-lapse movie
Busy (buSY)
AF point selection
([
] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)
AF point registration
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card warning (Card)
Error code (Err)
([
] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP)
Card warning (Card 1/2)
Card full warning (FuLL 1/2)
Cleaning image sensor (CLn)
Possible shots
Self-timer countdown
Bulb exposure time
Card error warning (Err)
Error number
White balance
(p.174)
Q
Auto: Ambience
priority
Remaining images to record
Qw
W
Auto: White priority
Daylight
E
R
Y
Shade
Cloudy
Tungsten
light
U
White
fluorescent
light
I
Flash
O
P
Custom
Color temperature
<g> SD card indicator
<u> White balance correction
(p.179)
<J> SD card selection icon
<f> CF card indicator
<a> Time-lapse movie shooting
<O> Exposure compensation
<J> CF card selection icon
<N> Auto Lighting Optimizer
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
29
Nomenclature
<w> HDR shooting
X
One-Shot AF
9
AI Focus AF
Z
<P> Multiple-exposure
AI Servo AF
4 L
Manual focus
<J> Bulb timer shooting
(p.219)
<H> Interval timer
u
Single shooting
o High-speed
continuous shooting
Low-speed
<r> GPS
acquisition status
i
continuous shooting
Silent single shooting
Silent continuous
shooting
Self-timer: 10 sec./
remote control
B
M
<y>
Flash exposure
compensation
(p.244)
Q
k Self-timer: 2 sec./
remote control
q Evaluative metering
w Partial metering
r Spot metering
e Center-weighted
average metering
Exposure level
indicator
Exposure compensation amount
Flash exposure compensation
Battery level (p.48)
<0> Monochrome
<i> ISO speed
<A> Highlight tone priority
(p.187)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30
Nomenclature
Viewfinder Information
Focusing screen
Aspect ratio
line (1:1)
<S> Single AF point
<O> Spot AF point
Crop area (1.6x)
Crop area (1.3x)
Area AF frame
<
> Battery
<z> Warning symbol
Flicker detection
Drive mode (p.142)
Metering mode (p.212)
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
31
Nomenclature
<i>ISO speed
<o> Focus
indicator
<e>AF status indicator
AEB in-progress
(p.215)
Number of remaining
<D>Flash-ready
Improper FE lock
warning
Exposure level indicator
<y> Flash exposure
Shutter speed (p.206)
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
AF point selection
([ ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)
AF point registration
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card warning (Card)
Error code (Err)
([
] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP)
Card warning (Card 1/2)
Card full warning (FuLL 1/2)
Aperture (p.208)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32
Nomenclature
Mode Dial
You can set the shooting mode. Turn the Mode Dial while holding down
the Mode Dial center (Mode Dial lock release button).
F
d
: Program AE (p.204)
Custom shooting mode
You can register the shooting mode (d/s/f/a/F), AF
operation, menu settings, etc., to w, x, y Mode Dial positions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
33
Nomenclature
Battery Charger LC-E6
Power plug
Battery pack slot
Charge lamp
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter
of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.
Battery Charger LC-E6E
Power cord
Charge lamp
Battery pack slot
Power cord socket
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34
Nomenclature
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through the
camera’s strap mount eyelet from the
bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s
buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the
strap to take up any slack and make sure the
strap will not loosen from the buckle.
The eyepiece cover is also attached to
the strap (p.236).
Eyepiece cover
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
35
Nomenclature
Using the Cable Protector
When connecting the camera to a computer, printer, Wireless File
Transmitter or GPS Receiver, use the provided interface cable or one
When connecting the interface cable, also use the provided cable
protector. Using the cable protector prevents the cable from accidental
disconnection and the terminal from getting damaged.
Using the Provided Interface Cable and a Genuine HDMI Cable
(sold separately)
1
2
Clamp
Cable protector
3
4
Provided interface cable
5
HDMI cable (sold separately)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36
Nomenclature
Using a Genuine Interface Cable (sold separately)
If you use a genuine interface cable (sold
clamp before attaching the clamp to the cable
protector.
Clamp
Connecting interface cable without using the cable protector may
damage the digital terminal.
Do not use a USB 2.0 cable equipped with a Micro-B plug. It may
damage the camera’s digital terminal.
As shown in the lower-right illustration for step 4, check that the interface
cable is securely attached to the digital terminal.
To connect the camera to a TV set, using HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) is recommended. Using the cable protector is recommended
even when connecting an HDMI cable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
37
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38
Charging the Battery
Remove the protective cover.
Detach the protective cover provided
1
2
3
with the battery.
Attach the battery.
As shown in the illustration, attach the
battery securely to the charger.
To detach the battery, follow the
above procedure in reverse.
Recharge the battery.
For LC-E6
As shown by the arrow, flip out the
battery charger’s prongs and insert
the prongs into a power outlet.
LC-E6
For LC-E6E
LC-E6E
Connect the power cord to the
charger and insert the plug into a
power outlet.
X Recharging starts automatically and
the charge lamp blinks in orange.
Charge Lamp
Charge Level
Color
Display
0-49%
50-74%
75% or higher
Fully charged
Blinks once per second
Blinks twice per second
Blinks three times per second
Lights up
Orange
Green
It takes approx. 2 hr. and 30 min. to fully recharge a completely exhausted battery at
room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time required to recharge the battery will vary
greatly depending on the ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.
For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /
41°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40
Charging the Battery
Tips for Using the Battery and Charger
Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity.
After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
You can attach the cover in a different
orientation to indicate whether the battery
has been recharged or not.
If the battery has been recharged, attach the
cover so that the battery-shaped hole <
> is
aligned over the blue sticker on the battery. If the battery is
exhausted, attach the cover in the opposite orientation.
When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount
of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge and shorter
battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover attached. Storing
the battery when it is fully charged may lower the battery’s performance.
The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for
the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage
transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can damage the battery charger.
If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully
charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.
After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for
approx. 10 sec.
will not be recharged.
The charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
41
Installing and Removing the Battery
Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N (or LP-E6) into the camera.
The camera’s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed,
and darkens when the battery is removed.
Installing the Battery
Open the cover.
Slide the lever as shown by the
1
arrows and open the cover.
Insert the battery.
2
Insert the end with the battery
contacts.
Insert the battery until it locks in
place.
Close the cover.
Press the cover until it snaps shut.
3
Only Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 can be used.
Removing the Battery
Open the cover and remove the
battery.
Press the battery lock lever as shown
by the arrow and remove the battery.
To prevent short circuiting of the
battery contacts, be sure to attach the
provided protective cover (p.40) to
the battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
Installing and Removing the Card
The camera can use a CF card and an SD card. Images can be
recorded when at least one card is installed in the camera.
If both types of card are inserted, you can select which card to record
Cautions for Using an SD Card
If you use an SD card, be sure the card’s write-protect switch is set
upward to enable writing/erasing.
Installing the Card
Open the cover.
Slide the cover as shown by the
1
arrows to open it.
CF card
Insert the card.
The camera-front side slot is for a CF
2
card, and the camera-back side slot
is for an SD card.
Face the CF card’s label toward
you and insert the end with the
small holes into the camera.
SD card
If the card is inserted in the wrong
way, it may damage the camera.
X The CF card eject button will stick
out.
With the SD card’s label facing
you, push in the card until it clicks
in place.
Write-protect switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
43
Installing and Removing the Card
Close the cover.
3
Close the cover and slide it in the
direction shown by the arrows until it
snaps shut.
X When you set the power switch to
shots and the loaded card(s) will be
displayed on the LCD panel.
The images will be recorded to the
card indicated by the arrow < >
icon.
Card
Possible
selection icon shots
CF card indicator
SD card indicator
The camera cannot use Type II CF cards, hard disk-type cards, or CFast
cards.
Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used (card error will be displayed).
Ultra DMA (UDMA) CF cards can also be used with the camera. UDMA
cards enable faster data writing.
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards are supported. UHS-I SDHC or SDXC
memory cards can also be used.
The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the
card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.
“Possible Shots” displays the number of shots based on the [z4: Crop/
Even if shooting 2,000 or more shots is possible, the indicator will display
only up to 1999.
Setting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44
Installing and Removing the Card
Removing the Card
Open the cover.
1
Set the power switch to <2>.
Make sure the access lamp is off,
then open the cover.
If [Recording...] is displayed on the
LCD monitor, close the cover.
Access lamp
Remove the card.
To remove the CF card, push the
eject button.
2
To remove the SD card, push it in
gently and release it. Then pull it out.
Pull the card straight out, then close
the cover.
CF card eject button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
45
Installing and Removing the Card
When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are
being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being
transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also,
never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or
blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or banging the camera around.
• Unplugging and connecting a power cord (when an AC adapter kit
is used).
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (p.199).
If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove
and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all
may then return to normal.
Do not touch the SD card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects.
Do not expose the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the
contacts, contact failure may result.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46
Turning on the Power
If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting
<1> : The camera turns on.
<2> : The camera is turned off and
does not operate. Set to this
position when not using the
camera.
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever you set the power switch
to <1> or <2>, sensor
cleaning will be executed
automatically. (A small sound may be
heard.) During the sensor cleaning,
the LCD monitor will display <f>.
You can still shoot during sensor cleaning by pressing the shutter
If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and
not a malfunction.
3 Auto Power Off
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after 1
minute of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just press the
shutter button halfway.
You can change the auto power off time with [52: Auto power off]
(p.69).
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to
the card, [Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the
recording finishes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
47
Turning on the Power
z Battery Level Indicator
When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be
indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon <b> indicates
that the battery will be exhausted soon.
Display
Level (%) 100 - 70 69 - 50 49 - 20 19 - 10 9 - 1
0
Number of Possible Shots
(Approx. number of shots)
Room Temperature
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Possible shots
700
660
The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, no Live View
shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
Possible shots with Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately)
• With LP-E6N x 2: approx. twice the shots without the battery grip.
• With AA/LR6 alkaline batteries at room temperature (23°C / 73°F): approx.
140 shots.
Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery sooner:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor frequently.
The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual
shooting conditions.
The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on
the lens used, the battery may exhaust faster.
With Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately) loaded with AA/R6 batteries,
a four-level indicator will be displayed. (x/m will not be
displayed.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48
3Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone are
reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow the steps
below, making sure to set the time zone first. Set the camera to the time
zone in which you currently live so that, when you travel, you can simply
change the setting to the correct time zone for your destination and the
camera will automatically adjust the date/time.
Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based
on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.
Display the menu screen.
1
Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
Under the [52] tab, select [Date/
2 Time/Zone].
Press the <Q> button and select the
[5] tab.
Turn the <6> dial to select the [52]
tab.
Turn the <5> dial to select [Date/
Time/Zone], then press <0>.
Set the time zone.
3
[London] is set by default.
Turn the <5> dial to select [Time
zone].
Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Turn the <5> dial to select the time
zone, then press <0>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
49
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
Set the date and time.
4
5
Turn the <5> dial to select the number.
Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
desired setting, then press <0>
(Returns to <s>).
Set the daylight saving time.
Set it if necessary.
Turn the <5> dial to select [Y].
Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Turn the <5> dial to select [Z], then
press <0>.
When the daylight saving time is set
to [Z], the time set in step 4 will
advance by 1 hr. If [Y] is set, the
daylight saving time will be canceled
and the time will go back by 1 hr.
Exit the setting.
Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],
then press <0>.
6
X The date/time/zone and daylight
saving time will be set and the menu
will reappear.
The date/time/zone settings may be reset when the camera is stored
without the battery, when its battery becomes exhausted, or when it is
exposed to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period. If this
happens, set the date/time/zone again.
After changing the time zone, check that the correct date/time are set.
When performing [Sync time between cameras] via Wireless File
Transmitter, using another EOS 5DS/EOS 5DS R is recommended. If
you perform [Sync time between cameras] using different models, the
time zone or time may not be set correctly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50
3 Selecting the Interface Language
The date/time that were set will start from when you select [OK] in step 6.
In step 3, the time displayed on the upper right of the screen is the time
difference compared with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If you do
not see your time zone, set the time zone while referring to the difference
with UTC.
3 Selecting the Interface Language
Display the menu screen.
1
Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
Under the [52] tab, select
2 [LanguageK].
Press the <Q> button and select the
[5] tab.
Turn the <6> dial to select the [52]
tab.
Turn the <5> dial to select
[LanguageK], then press <0>.
Set the desired language.
3
Turn the <5> dial to select the
language, then press <0>.
X The interface language will change.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
51
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
The camera is compatible with all Canon EF lenses. The camera
cannot be used with EF-S or EF-M lenses.
Attaching a Lens
Remove the caps.
Remove the rear lens cap and the
1
body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
Attach the lens.
2
Align the red dots on the lens and
camera and turn the lens as shown by
the arrow until it clicks in place.
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
3 to <AF>.
<AF> stands for autofocus.
<MF> stands for manual focus.
Autofocus will not operate.
Remove the front lens cap.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Detaching the Lens
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrow.
Turn the lens until it stops, then
detach it.
Attach the rear lens cap to the
detached lens.
Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause
loss of vision.
When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do
not touch the rotating part.
Minimizing Dust
When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the
body cap to the camera.
Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
53
Basic Operation
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity
Turn the dioptric adjustment
knob.
Turn the knob left or right so that the
AF points in the viewfinder look
sharp.
If the knob is difficult to turn, remove
If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder
image, using Dioptric Adjustment Lens Eg (sold separately) is
recommended.
Holding the Camera
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera
shake.
Horizontal shooting
Vertical shooting
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
3. Rest your hand’s right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.
6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54
Basic Operation
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing Halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel for 4 sec.
(metering timer/0).
Pressing Completely
This releases the shutter and takes the
picture.
Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the
shutter button completely.
In the <d> <s> <f> <a> <F> shooting modes, pressing the
<p> button will execute the same operation as pressing the shutter
button halfway.
If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first
or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely
immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.
Even during menu display or image playback, you can go back to
shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button halfway.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
55
Basic Operation
Mode Dial
Turn the dial while holding down
the lock release button at the
center of the dial.
Use it to set the shooting mode.
6 Main Dial
After pressing a button, turn the
(1)
<6> dial.
When you press a button such as
<n> <o> <m>, the
respective function remains selected for
6 sec. (9). During this time, you can
turn the <6> dial to change the setting.
When the function selection ends or if
you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will be ready to shoot.
Use this dial to select the metering
mode, AF operation, ISO speed, AF
point, etc.
Turn the <6> dial only.
(2)
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD
panel, turn the <6> dial to change the
setting.
Use this dial to set the shutter speed,
aperture, etc.
The operations in (1) are possible even when the <R> switch is set to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56
Basic Operation
5 Quick Control Dial
(1)
After pressing a button, turn the
<5> dial.
When you press a button such as
<n> <o> <m>, the
respective function remains selected for
6 sec. (9). During this time, you can
turn the <5> dial to change the setting.
When the function selection ends or if
you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will be ready to shoot.
Use this dial to select the white
balance, drive mode, flash exposure
compensation, AF point, etc.
(2)
Turn the <5> dial only.
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD
panel, turn the <5> dial to change the
setting.
Use this dial to set the exposure
compensation amount, the aperture
setting for manual exposures, etc.
The operations in (1) are possible even when the <R> switch is set to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
57
Basic Operation
9 Multi-controller
The <9> consists of an eight-direction key and a button at the center.
Use your thumb to tilt the <9> in the desired direction.
Use it to select the AF point, correct
the white balance, move the AF point
or magnifying frame during Live View
shooting, scroll around magnified
images during playback, operate the
Quick Control screen, etc.
You can also use it to select and set
menu items.
For menus and Quick Control, the
Multi-controller works only in the
vertical and horizontal directions. It
does not work in diagonal directions.
h Touch Pad
During movie shooting, the touch pad provides a quiet way to adjust the
shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, ISO speed, and
sound recording level (p.302).
This function works when [z5: Silent Control] is set to [Enable h].
After pressing the <Q> button,
tap the <5> dial’s inner ring at
the top, bottom, left, or right.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58
Basic Operation
R Multi Function Lock
switch to the right, you can prevent the Main Dial, Quick Control Dial,
and Multi-controller from moving and changing a setting inadvertently.
<R> switch set to the left:
Lock released
<R> switch set to the right:
Lock engaged
If the <R> switch is set to the right and you try to operate any of the
locked camera controls, <L> will appear in the viewfinder and on the LCD
U LCD Panel Illumination
You can illuminate the LCD panel by
pressing the <U> button. Turn on (9)
or off the LCD panel illumination by
pressing the <U> button.
During a bulb exposure, pressing the shutter button completely will turn off
the LCD panel illumination.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
59
Basic Operation
Displaying Quick Control Screen
will appear. You can then check the current shooting function settings.
Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting
function settings (p.61).
Then you can press the <B> button to turn off the screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the
LCD monitor. This is called Quick Control.
The basic operating procedures are the same for the Quick Control
Press the <Q> button (7).
1
X The Quick Control screen will appear.
Set the desired functions.
2
Use <9> to select a function.
X The setting of the selected function is
displayed.
Turn the <5> or <6> dial to
change the setting.
<A> mode
<d/s/f/a/F> modes
Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
3
X The captured image will be displayed.
In the <A> mode with the Quick Control screen displayed, you can only
set recording function, card selection, image-recording quality, and drive
mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
61
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
Settable Functions on Quick Control Screen
Shutter speed (p.206)
Shooting mode* (p.33)
Highlight tone priority* (p.187)
ISO speed (p.158)
Exposure
compensation/
AEB setting
Flash exposure
compensation (p.244)
Custom Controls (p.413)
Picture Style (p.164)
AF operation (p.86)
Image-recording quality
White balance (p.174)
Recording function/Card selection
White balance correction /
White balance bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Drive mode (p.142)
* Functions marked with an asterisk cannot be set with the Quick Control
screen.
Custom Quick Control Screen
You can customize the layout of the Custom Quick Control screen. This
feature lets you display and position the shooting functions on the
Custom Quick Control screen as desired. For details, see page 427.
On the Custom Quick Control screen, if you press the <Q> button and
there are no functions you can set with Quick Control, the Quick Control
icon on the lower left of the screen will be displayed in orange.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
Quick Control Screen
Select a function and press <0>.
The function setting screen will
appear.
Turn the <6> or <5> dial to
change some of the settings. There
are also functions that are set by
pressing the button.
Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to the previous screen.
Ð <0>
When you select <
press the <M> button, the
previous screen will reappear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
63
3 Menu Operations
You can set various settings with the menus such as the image-recording
quality, date/time, etc.
<M> button
<6> Main Dial
LCD monitor
<5> Quick Control Dial
<Q> button
<0> button
A Mode Menu Screen
* Certain menu tabs and menu items are not displayed in the <A> mode.
d/s/f/a/F Mode Menu Screen
3: Playback
2: AF
z: Shooting
5: Set-up
8: Custom Functions
9: My Menu
Main tabs
Secondary
tabs
Menu settings
Menu items
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64
3 Menu Operations
Menu Setting Procedure
Display the menu screen.
Press the <M> button to display
1
the menu screen.
Select a tab.
Each time you press the <Q> button,
the main tab will switch.
2
Turn the <6> dial to select a
secondary tab.
For example, the [z5] tab refers to
the screen displayed when the z
(Shooting) tab’s fifth dot “ ” from the
left is selected.
Select the desired item.
Turn the <5> dial to select the item,
then press <0>.
3
Select the setting.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
desired setting.
4
The current setting is indicated in
blue.
Adjust the setting.
Press <0> to set it.
5
6
Exit the setting.
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to shooting-ready.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
65
3 Menu Operations
The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.
You can also use <9> to operate and set menu functions. (Except for
[31: Erase images] and [51: Format card].)
To cancel the operation, press the <M> button.
Dimmed Menu Items
Example: When Multi Shot
Noise Reduction is set
Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The
menu item is dimmed if another function
setting is overriding it.
You can see the overriding function by
selecting the dimmed menu item and
pressing <0>.
If you cancel the overriding function’s
setting, the dimmed menu item will
become settable.
Some dimmed menu items will not show the overriding function.
With [54: Clear all camera settings], you can reset the menu functions to
the default settings (p.70).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66
Before You Start
3 Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or
computer, format the card with this camera.
Cautions for Formatting the Card
When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be
erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is
nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to
a computer, etc., before formatting the card.
Select [Format card].
1
Under the [51] tab, select [Format
card], then press <0>.
Select the card.
[f] is the CF card, and [g] is the SD
2
card.
Select the card, then press <0>.
Select [OK].
3
X The card will be formatted.
When [g] is selected, low-level
formatting is possible (p.68).
For low-level formatting, press the
<L> button to append [Low level
format] with a checkmark <X>, then
select [OK].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
67
Before You Start
Format the card in the following cases:
The card is new.
The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full with images or data.
Low-level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting if the SD card’s reading or writing speed
seems slow or if you want to totally erase all data on the card.
Since low-level formatting will erase all recordable sectors on the SD card,
the formatting will take longer than normal formatting.
You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this
case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use the SD card as
usual.
When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the
card, execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to
prevent the personal data from being leaked.
be installed on your computer. Then format the card with the camera.
The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller
than the capacity indicated on the card.
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68
Before You Start
3 Disabling the Beeper
You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved or
during self-timer operation.
Select [Beep].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Beep],
1
then press <0>.
Select [Disable].
Select [Disable], then press <0>.
X The beeper will not sound.
2
3 Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after a set
time of idle operation elapses. The default setting is 1 min., but this
setting can be changed. If you do not want the camera to turn off
automatically, set this to [Disable]. After the power turns off, you can
turn on the camera again by pressing the shutter button or other
buttons.
Select [Auto power off].
1
Under the [52] tab, select [Auto
power off], then press <0>.
Set the desired time.
2
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Even if [Disable] is set, the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after 30
min. to save power. (The camera’s power does not turn off.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
69
Before You Start
3 Setting the Image Review Time
You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor just
after shooting. To keep the image displayed, set [Hold]. To not have the
image displayed, set [Off].
Select [Image review].
1
Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
review], then press <0>.
Set the desired time.
2
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
If [Hold] is set, the image will be displayed until the auto power off time
elapses.
3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN
The camera’s shooting function settings and menu settings can be
reverted to their defaults.
Select [Clear all camera settings].
1
Under the [54] tab, select [Clear all
camera settings], then press <0>.
Select [OK].
X Clearing all the camera settings will
2
reset the camera to the default
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70
Before You Start
Shooting Function Settings
AF Settings
AF operation
AF area selection Single-point AF
mode
One-Shot AF
Case1/Parameter
settings of all
cases cleared
Case 1 - 6
(Manual Selection)
AF point selection Center
Registered AF point Canceled
AI Servo 1st
image priority
Equal priority
Equal priority
Metering mode
ISO speed
q
(Evaluative metering)
AI Servo 2nd
image priority
Auto
Minimum limit: 100 Lens electronic
Maximum limit: 6400 MF
Enable after
One-Shot AF
ISO speed range
Minimum limit: 100
Maximum limit: 3200
AF-assist beam firing Enable
Auto ISO range
One-Shot AF
release priority
Focus priority
Minimum shutter
speed
Auto
Lens drive when Continue focus
AF impossible
search
Drive mode
Exposure
compensation/AEB
u
(Single shooting)
Selectable AF
point
Canceled
61 points
Flash exposure
compensation
Select AF area
selection mode
All items
selected
Canceled
Multiple exposure Disable
AF area selection
method
M-Fn button
HDR Mode
Interval timer
Bulb timer
Disable HDR
Disable
Disable
Orientation linked Same for both
AF point
vertical/horizontal
Anti-flicker shooting Disable
Initial AF point,
AI Servo AF
Auto
Mirror lockup
Disable
Viewfinder display
Electronic level Hide
Grid display
Show/hide in
viewfinder
Automatic AF
point selection:
EOS iTR AF
Enable
Hide
Only Flicker
selected
Manual AF point Stops at AF area
selection pattern edges
Custom Functions Unchanged
AF point display Selected
during focus
(constant)
External Speedlite control
Flash firing
E-TTL II
Enable
Evaluative flash
VF display
illumination
Auto
flash metering metering
AF point during
AI Servo AF
Non illuminated
Flash sync. speed
Auto
in Av mode
Disable/
Adjustment
amount retained
AF
Microadjustment
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
71
Before You Start
Image Recording Settings
Camera Settings
Image quality
Crop/aspect ratio
Picture Style
73
Auto power off
1 min.
Full-frame
Standard
Beep
Enable
Release shutter
without card
Enable
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Standard
Image review time
Highlight alert
2 sec.
Disable
Disable
Off
Lens aberration correction
AF point display
Playback grid
Peripheralillumination Enable/Correction
correction
data retained
Histogram display Brightness
Movie playback count Unchanged
Chromatic aberration Enable/Correction
correction
data retained
Q (Ambience
priority)
Magnification
(Approx.)
2x (magnify
from center)
White balance
Custom White Balance Canceled
White balance shift Canceled
Control over HDMI Disable
Image jump w/6
Auto rotate
e (10 images)
OnzD
Auto
White balance
Canceled
bracketing
LCD brightness
Date/Time/Zone
Eye-Fi settings
Language
Color space
sRGB
Unchanged
Disable
Long exposure
noise reduction
Disable
Unchanged
Unchanged
Video system
High ISO speed
noise reduction
Standard
z button display All items
options
selected
Highlight tone priority Disable
Record function
File numbering
File name
Standard
Continuous
Preset code
Enable
Custom Quick
Control
Unchanged
m
button function Rating
Auto cleaning
Dust Delete Data
Custom shooting mode Unchanged
Copyright information Unchanged
Erased
Configure:
Unchanged
MY MENU
Menu display
Normal display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72
Before You Start
Live View Shooting Settings
Movie Shooting Settings
Movie Servo AF Disable
Live View shooting Enable
AF method
u+Tracking
Disable
Off
AF method
u+Tracking
Off
Continuous AF
Grid display
Grid display
Movie recording NTSC: L6X
size PAL: L5X
Exposure
simulation
Enable
Sound recording Auto
Wind filter
Attenuator
Disable
Disable
Silent LV
shooting
Mode 1
8 sec.
Metering timer
Silent LV shooting Mode 1
Metering timer 8 sec.
Time code
Count up
Unchanged
Start time setting Unchanged
Movie
Unchanged
recording count
Movie playback
Unchanged
count
Drop frame
Unchanged
Silent control
Disable h
V button
function
/z
Time-lapse
movie
Disable
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
73
l Displaying the Grid
You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt
or compose the shot.
Select [Viewfinder display].
1
Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
Select [Grid display].
2
Select [Show].
X When you exit the menu, the grid will
3
appear in the viewfinder.
You can display a grid on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the
viewfinder to help you correct camera tilt.
Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor
Press the <B> button.
1
Each time you press the <B>
button, the screen display will
change.
Display the electronic level.
If the electronic level does not
appear, set [53: z button
display options] so that the
electronic level can be displayed
Check the camera’s tilt.
2
The horizontal and vertical tilt are
displayed in 1° increments.
When the red line turns green, it
indicates that the tilt is almost
corrected.
Vertical level
Horizontal level
Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx.
±1°.
If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error will be larger.
During Live View shooting and before movie shooting, you can also display
the electronic level as described above (except with u+ Tracking).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
75
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
3 Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder
An electronic level can be displayed on the upper part of the viewfinder.
Since this can be displayed while you shoot, you can correct the
camera tilt while shooting.
Select [Viewfinder display].
1
Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
Select [Electronic level].
2
Select [Show].
3
Press the shutter button halfway.
4
X The electronic level will be displayed
in the viewfinder.
This also works with vertical shooting.
or greater
4°
1°
1°
7°
or greater
7.5°
Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx.
±1°.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76
3
Setting the Viewfinder Information DisplayN
The shooting function settings (Battery, White balance, Drive mode, AF
operation, Metering mode, Image quality: JPEG/RAW, Flicker
detection) can be displayed in the viewfinder.
By default, only Flicker detection is checkmarked [X].
Select [Viewfinder display].
1
Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
Select [Show/hide in viewfinder].
2
Checkmark [X] the information to
3 be displayed.
Select the information to display and
press <0> to append a checkmark
<X>.
Repeat this procedure to append a
checkmark [X] to all the information
to be displayed. Then select [OK].
X When you exit the menu, the
checkmarked information will appear
If no card is inserted in the camera, the image-recording quality will not be
displayed.
When you press the <n> or <o> button, operate the lens’s
focus mode switch, or when a lens equipped with electronic manual
focusing function is used and the AF/MF switches as the lens’s focusing
viewfinder regardless of whether it is checkmarked.
If [Battery] is not checkmarked, the battery check icon (
/
) will
be displayed in the viewfinder when the battery level is low.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
77
Help
When [z Help] is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen, the
feature’s description (Help) can be displayed. The Help screen is
displayed only while you hold down the <B> button. If the Help fills
more than one screen, a scroll bar will appear on the right edge. To
scroll, hold down the <B> button and turn the <5> dial.
Example: [21: Case2]
B
Î
Scroll bar
Example: [24: Orientation linked AF point]
B
Î
Example: [83: Multi function lock]
B
Î
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78
2
Basic Shooting
This chapter explains how to use the Mode Dial’s <A>
(Scene Intelligent Auto) mode for easy picture taking.
In the <A> mode, all you do is point and shoot and the
camera sets everything automatically (p.456). Also, to prevent
botched pictures due to mistaken operations, advanced
shooting function settings cannot be changed.
Scene Intelligent Auto
Auto Lighting Optimizer
the image automatically to obtain the optimum brightness and
contrast. It is also enabled by default in the <d>, <s>, or
<f> mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
79
A
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene
and sets the optimum settings automatically. It also adjusts focus
automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving (p.83).
Set the Mode Dial to <A>.
1
Turn the Mode Dial while holding
down the lock release button at the
center.
Area AF frame
Aim the Area AF frame over the
2 subject.
All the AF points will be used to focus,
and the camera will focus on the
closest object.
Aiming the center of the Area AF
frame over the subject will make
focusing easier.
Focus on the subject.
3
Press the shutter button halfway. The
lens’s focusing ring will rotate to
focus.
X During the autofocus operation,
<e> will be displayed.
X The AF point that achieves focus will
be displayed. At the same time, the
beeper will sound and the focus
indicator <o> will light up.
X In low light, the AF point(s) will light
up briefly in red.
Focus indicator
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
4
X The captured image will be displayed
for 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.
The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If you did not obtain the desired color tones, change the
mode to <d>, <s>, <f>, or <a>, set a Picture Style other than
FAQ
The focus indicator <o> blinks and focus is not achieved.
Aim the Area AF frame over an area with good contrast, then press
move away and try again. If focus cannot be achieved, the AF status
indicator <e> will also blink.
When focus is achieved, the AF points do not light up in red.
The AF points light up in red only when focus is achieved in low-light
conditions.
Multiple AF points light up simultaneously.
Focus has been achieved at all those points. You can take the
picture as long as an AF point covering the target subject is lighting
up.
The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus indicator <o>
does not light up.)
It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving
subject. (The AF status indicator <e> lights up, but the focus
confirmation light <o> does not light up.) You can take sharp
pictures of a moving subject.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
81
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus on the
subject.
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus),
set it to <AF> (autofocus).
The shutter speed display is blinking.
Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject
due to camera shake. Using a tripod or a Canon EX-series Speedlite
When the external flash was used, the bottom part of the
picture came out unnaturally dark.
If a hood is attached to the lens, it can obstruct the flash light. If the
subject is close, detach the hood before taking the picture with flash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82
A
Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Recomposing the Shot
Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to
create a balanced background and good perspective.
In the <A> mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a
still subject will lock the focus on that subject. Recompose the shot
while keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, and then press the
shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called “focus lock”.
Shooting a Moving Subject
In the <A> mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes)
while or after you focus, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus on the
subject continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long
as you keep the Area AF frame positioned over the subject while
pressing the shutter button halfway, the focusing will be continuous.
When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button completely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
83
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
A Live View Shooting
You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is
called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 255.
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <A>.
1
Display the Live View image on
2 the LCD monitor.
Press the <0> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
Focus on the subject.
3
Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely.
X The picture is taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
4
X When the playback display ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
Press the <0> button to exit the
Live View shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84
3
Setting the AF and
Drive Modes
The AF points in the viewfinder
are arranged to make AF shooting
suitable for a wide variety of
subjects and scenes.
You can also select the AF operation and drive mode
that best match the shooting conditions and subject.
A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in the following modes: <d>
<s> <f> <a> <F>.
In the <A> mode, the AF operation and AF area selection
mode are set automatically.
<AF> stands for autofocus. <MF> stands for manual focus.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
85
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting
conditions or subject. In the <A> mode, “AI Focus AF” is set
automatically.
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <AF>.
1
Set the <d> <s> <f> <a>
2 <F> mode.
Press the <o> button. (9)
3
Select the AF operation.
4
While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
X : One-Shot AF
9 : AI Focus AF
Z : AI Servo AF
In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F> mode, AF is also possible by
pressing the <p> button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Suited for still subjects. When you
press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will focus only once.
When focus is achieved, the AF point
that achieved focus will be displayed,
and the focus indicator <o> in the
viewfinder will also light up.
exposure setting will be set at the
same time as focus is achieved.
AF point
Focus indicator
While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be
locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.
If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder
will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter
button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot and try to focus again
or see “When Autofocus Fails” (p.140).
If [z1: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus
is achieved.
After achieving focus with One-Shot AF, you can lock the focus on a
subject and recompose the shot. This is called “focus lock”. This is
convenient when you want to focus on a peripheral subject not covered
by the Area AF frame.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
87
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing
distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button
halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously.
The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
selection AF, focus tracking will continue as long as the Area AF
frame covers the subject.
With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
Also, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder will not light up.
AI Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically
AI Focus AF switches the AF operation from One-Shot AF to AI
Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving.
After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF, if the subject starts
moving, the camera will detect the movement, change the AF
operation automatically to AI Servo AF, and start tracking the moving
subject.
When focus is achieved with AI Focus AF with the Servo operation active,
the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus indicator <o> in
the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus will not be locked in this case.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
AF Operation Indicator
While you press the shutter button
halfway and the camera focuses with AF,
the <e> icon will appear under the
focus indicator in the viewfinder.
In One-Shot AF mode, the icon also appears if you press the shutter
button halfway after focus is achieved.
AF Points Lighting Up in Red
By default, the AF points light up in red in low-light conditions. In the
<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F> mode, you can set whether to have
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
89
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
The camera has 61 AF points for autofocusing. You can select the AF
area selection mode and AF point(s) suiting the scene or subject.
Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of
usable AF points and AF point patterns will differ. For details,
see “Lenses and Usable AF Points” on page 100.
AF Area Selection Mode
You can select one of six AF area selection modes. For the setting
procedure, see page 92.
Single-point Spot AF
(Manual selection)
For pinpoint focusing.
Single-point AF
(Manual selection)
Select one AF point to focus.
AF point expansion
(Manual selection
)
The manually-selected AF point <S>
and four adjacent AF points <w> (above,
below, on the left, and on the right) are
used to focus.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
AF point expansion (Manual
selection, surrounding points)
The manually-selected AF point <S>
and the surrounding AF points <w> are
used to focus.
Zone AF
(Manual selection of zone)
One of nine zones is used to focus.
61-point automatic selection
AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is
used to focus. This mode is set
automatically in the <A> mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
91
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode
Press the <S> button. (9)
1
Press the <B> button.
2
Look through the viewfinder and
press the <B> button.
Each time you press the <B>
button, the AF area selection mode
changes.
With [24: Select AF area selec. mode], you can limit the selectable
If you set [24: AF area selection method] to [S9Main Dial], you
can select the AF area selection mode by pressing the <S> button,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
Selecting the AF Point Manually
You can manually select the AF point or zone.
Press the <S> button. (9)
X The AF points will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
1
In AF point expansion modes,
adjacent AF points will also be
displayed.
In the Zone AF mode, the selected
zone will be displayed.
Select an AF point.
2
The AF point selection will change in
the direction you tilt <9>. If you
press <9> straight down, the center
AF point (or center zone) will be
selected.
You can also select a horizontal AF
point by turning the <6> dial and
select a vertical AF point by turning
the <5> dial.
In the Zone AF mode, turning the
<6> or <5> dial will change the
zone in a looping sequence.
When [24: Initial AF pt,
AI Servo AF] is set to [Initial
AF pt
Servo’s AF starting position.
When you press the <S> button, the LCD panel displays the following:
• 61-point automatic selection AF and Zone AF:
AF
• Single-point Spot AF, Single-point AF, and AF point expansion: SEL
(Center)/SEL AF (Off-center)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
93
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
AF Point Display Indications
Pressing the <S> button lights up the AF points that are cross-type AF
points for high-precision autofocusing. The blinking AF points are
Registering the AF point
You can register a frequently-used AF point to the camera.
menu’s detailed settings screens for [Metering and AF start], [Switch
to registered AF point], [Direct AF point selection], or [Register/
recall shooting func], you can instantly switch from the current AF
point to the registered AF point.
For details on registering the AF point, see page 418.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94
AF Area Selection ModesN
Single-point Spot AF (Manual selection)
For pinpoint focusing over a narrower area than
with single-point AF (manual selection). Select one
AF point < > to focus.
Effective for pinpoint focusing or focusing
overlapping subjects such as an animal in a cage.
Since Single-point Spot AF (manual selection)
covers a very small area, focusing may be difficult
during hand-held shooting or for a moving subject.
Single-point AF (Manual selection)
Select one AF point <S> to be used for focusing.
AF point expansion (Manual selection
)
The manually-selected AF point <S> and adjacent AF points <w>
(above, below, on the left, and on the right) are used to focus. Effective
when it is difficult to track a moving subject with just one AF point.
With AI Servo AF, the initial manually-selected AF point <S> must
focus-track the subject first. However, it is superior to Zone AF in
focusing on the target subject.
With One-Shot AF, when focus is achieved with expanded AF points,
the expanded AF points <S> will also be displayed along with the
manually-selected AF point <S>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
95
AF Area Selection ModesN
AF point expansion (Manual selection, surrounding points)
The manually-selected AF point <S> and surrounding AF points <w>
are used to focus. The AF point expansion is larger than with AF point
expansion (manual selection ), so the focusing is executed over a
wider area. Effective when it is difficult to track a moving subject with
just one AF point.
AI Servo AF and One-Shot AF work in the same way as with AF point
Zone AF (Manual selection of zone)
The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing. All the AF
points in the selected zone are used for the automatic AF point
selection. It is superior to single-point AF or AF point expansion in
achieving focus, and it is effective for moving subjects.
However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on
a specific target may be more difficult than with single-point AF or AF
point expansion.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96
AF Area Selection ModesN
61-point automatic selection AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used to focus. This mode is set
automatically in the <A> mode.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
With One-Shot AF, pressing the shutter button
halfway will display the AF point(s) <S> that
achieved focus. If multiple AF points are displayed,
it means they all have achieved focus. This mode
tends to focus on the nearest subject.
With AI Servo AF, you can set the AI Servo AF’s
starting position with [Initial AF pt,
AI Servo
track the subject during shooting, focusing will
continue.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
97
AF Area Selection ModesN
When AI Servo AF mode is set with 61-point automatic selection AF, or
Zone AF (manual selection of zone), the active AF point <S> will keep
switching to track the subject. However, under certain shooting
conditions (such as when the subject is small), it may not be able to track
the subject. Also, in low temperatures, the tracking response may
become slower.
With Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), focusing with an EOS-
dedicated, external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam may be difficult.
If a peripheral AF point or a wide-angle lens is used, achieving focus may
be difficult with an EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam.
In such a case, use an AF point closer to the center.
When the AF point(s) light up, part or all of the viewfinder may light up in
red. Also, if [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] is set, the semi-transparent,
masked area may light up in red. This is a characteristic of the AF point
display (using liquid crystal).
In low temperatures, the AF point’s display may be difficult to see. This is
a characteristic of AF point display (using liquid crystal).
With [24: Orientation linked AF point], you can set the AF area
selection mode + AF point (or only the AF point) separately for the
With [24: Selectable AF point], you can change the number of
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98
AF Sensor
The camera’s AF sensor has 61 AF points. The illustration below shows the AF
sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point. With f/2.8 or larger maximum
aperture lenses, high-precision AF is possible at the viewfinder center.
Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of usable
AF points and AF pattern will differ. For details, see pages 100-108.
Cross-type focusing: f/4 horizontal + f/5.6 vertical
Diagram
Cross-type focusing:
f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal
Dual cross-type focusing:
f/5.6 vertical
focusing
f/2.8 right diagonal + f/2.8 left diagonal
f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal
These focusing sensors are geared to obtain higher
precision focusing with f/2.8 or larger maximum aperture
lenses. A diagonal cross pattern makes it easier to focus
subjects that may be difficult to focus. They cover the five
AF points vertically aligned at the center.
These focusing sensors are geared to obtain high-precision
focusing with f/4 or larger maximum aperture lenses. Since
they have a horizontal pattern, they can detect vertical
lines.
These focusing sensors are geared for f/5.6 or larger
maximum aperture lenses. Since they have a horizontal
pattern, they can detect vertical lines. They cover the three
columns of AF points at the viewfinder’s center. The center AF
point and the adjacent AF points at the top and bottom are
compatible with f/8 or larger maximum-aperture lenses.
These focusing sensors are geared for f/5.6 or larger maximum
aperture lenses. Since they have a vertical pattern, they can
detect horizontal lines. They cover all 61 AF points. The center
AF point and the adjacent AF points on the left and on the right
are compatible with f/8 or larger maximum-aperture lenses.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
99
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Although the camera has 61 AF points, the number of usable AF
points and focusing patterns will differ depending on the lens. The
lenses are thereby classified into nine groups from A to I.
When using a lens in Groups F to H, fewer AF points will be usable.
which group the lens in use belongs to.
When you press the <S> button, the AF points indicated by the mark
will blink. (The
/
/
AF points will stay lit.) Regarding lighting up or
Regarding new lenses marketed after the EOS 5DS/EOS 5DS R Mark III
(in the first half of 2015), check the Canon Web site to see which group
they belong to.
Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions.
Group A
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and the focusing
precision is higher than with other AF
points.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group B
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and the focusing
precision is higher than with other AF
points.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
Group C
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
101
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group D
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and the focusing
precision is higher than with other AF
points.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
Group E
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group F
Autofocusing with only 47 points is possible. (Not possible with all 61
AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During
automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area
(Area AF frame) will be different from 61-point automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
Group G
Autofocusing with only 33 points is possible. (Not possible with all 61
AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During
automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area
(Area AF frame) will be different from 61-point automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
:
AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
103
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group H
AF is possible with the center AF point and the adjacent AF points above,
below, on the left, and on the right. Only the following AF area selection
modes are selectable: Single-point AF (manual selection), Single-point Spot
AF (manual selection), and AF point expansion (manual selection ).
If an Extender is attached to the lens and the maximum aperture is f/8
(between f/5.6 and f/8), AF will be possible.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to vertical lines
(top and bottom AF points adjacent
to the center AF point) or horizontal
lines (left and right AF points
adjacent to the center AF point).
Not manually selectable. It works
only when “AF point expansion
(manual selection )” is selected.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
If the maximum aperture is smaller than f/5.6 (maximum aperture
number is between f/5.6 and f/8), focus may not be achieved with AF
when shooting low-contrast or low-light subjects.
When Extender EF2x is attached to the EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
lens, AF is not possible.
If the maximum aperture is smaller than f/8 (maximum aperture number
exceeds f/8), AF is not possible during viewfinder shooting.
Group I
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
:
AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Lens Group Designations
(as of March 2015)
EF14mm f/2.8L USM
EF14mm f/2.8L II USM
EF15mm f/2.8 Fisheye
EF20mm f/2.8 USM
EF24mm f/1.4L USM
EF24mm f/1.4L II USM
EF24mm f/2.8
EF24mm f/2.8 IS USM
EF28mm f/1.8 USM
EF28mm f/2.8
EF28mm f/2.8 IS USM
EF35mm f/1.4L USM
EF35mm f/2
EF35mm f/2 IS USM
EF40mm f/2.8 STM
EF50mm f/1.0L USM
EF50mm f/1.2L USM
EF50mm f/1.4 USM
EF50mm f/1.8
EF50mm f/1.8 II
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro
+ LIFE SIZE Converter
EF85mm f/1.2L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L II USM
EF85mm f/1.8 USM
EF100mm f/2 USM
EF100mm f/2.8 Macro
EF100mm f/2.8 Macro USM
EF100mm f/2.8L Macro IS USM
EF135mm f/2L USM
EF135mm f/2L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
B
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
A
B
B
B
A
A
B
B
A
D
B
A
A
A
D
A
A
A
A
A
C
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
C
A
C
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
E
A
C
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
E
A
C*
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
E*
A
C
E
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
E
A
C
A
A
A
A
C
E
C
A
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF300mm f/4L USM
EF300mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF300mm f/4L USM + Extender EF2x H (f/8)
E
C
E
A
EF135mm f/2L USM + Extender EF2x
EF135mm f/2.8 (Softfocus)
EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
C
A
G
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
C
E
EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
G
A
H (f/8)
A
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
A*
C*
EF200mm f/1.8L USM + Extender EF2x C*
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x
E*
A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
105
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
A
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
C
E
C*
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
E*
A
H (f/8)
C
E
C
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM
EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
E
A
C
H (f/8)
F
H (f/8)
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF8-15mm f/4L Fisheye USM
EF11-24mm f/4L USM
G
H
(f/8)*
C
I
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
E
C
E
EF16-35mm f/2.8L USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L II USM
EF16-35mm f/4L IS USM
EF17-35mm f/2.8L USM
EF17-40mm f/4L USM
A
A
C
A
C
A
E
F
B
A
C
E
E
C
A
F
F
C
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
E
E
E
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
H (f/8)
C
E
EF20-35mm f/2.8L
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/5.6L USM
EF400mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
H (f/8)
EF20-35mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF22-55mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF24-70mm f/2.8L USM
EF24-70mm f/2.8L II USM
EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM
EF24-85mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM
EF28-70mm f/2.8L USM
EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5
EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 II
EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 III USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 IV USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 V USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6
E
H (f/8)
C
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
E
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
H (f/8)
C
E
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF600mm f/4L USM
H (f/8)
E
H
(f/8)*
C
EF600mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
E*
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II
H
(f/8)*
EF600mm f/4L USM + Extender EF2x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 III
EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 II USM
EF28-105mm f/4-5.6
EF28-105mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6
EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6 USM
EF28-300mm f/3.5-5.6L IS USM
EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5A
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 PZ
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 II
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 III
EF35-105mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF35-135mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-135mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF35-350mm f/3.5-5.6L USM
EF38-76mm f/4.5-5.6
E
E
E
E
F
F
E
E
E
E
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
E
H
H
E
E
F
E
E
E
E
E
A
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
H (f/8)
C
E
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF70-210mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF70-210mm f/4
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6L IS USM
EF70-300mm f/4.5-5.6 DO IS USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM
EF80-200mm f/2.8L
H (f/8)
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
A
E
F
F
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II
EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6
EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF100-200mm f/4.5A
EF100-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF100-300mm f/5.6
EF100-300mm f/5.6L
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5
EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5L
EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
C*
H (f/8)
E
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
E*
A
H (f/8)
C
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x
I
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
E
A
C
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x: With built-in Ext. 1.4x
E
E
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x + Extender EF1.4x
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x: With built-in Ext. 1.4x
+ Extender EF1.4x
E
C
E
H (f/8)
H (f/8)
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x + Extender EF2x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
107
Lenses and Usable AF Points
TS-E17mm f/4L
TS-E24mm f/3.5L
TS-E24mm f/3.5L II
TS-E45mm f/2.8
TS-E90mm f/2.8
C
C
C
A
A
When using a lens and an extender in the combination marked with *,
precise focus may not be achieved with AF. Refer to the instruction manual
of the lens or extender used.
Both “Extender EF1.4x” and “Extender EF2x” apply to all the I/II/III
models (under this grouping).
If you use a TS-E lens, manual focusing will be required. The lens group
designation of TS-E lenses applies only when you do not use tilt or shift
function.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108
3
Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
You can easily fine-tune AI Servo AF to suit a particular subject or
shooting scene just by selecting an option from case 1 to case 6. This
feature is called the “AF Configuration Tool.”
Select the [21] tab.
1
2
Select a case.
Turn the <5> dial to select a case
icon, then press <0>.
X The selected case will be set. The
selected case is indicated in blue.
Case 1 to 6
combinations of “Tracking sensitivity”, “Acceleration/deceleration
tracking”, and “AF point auto switching”. Refer to the table below to
select the case applicable to the subject or shooting scene.
Case Icon
Description
Applicable Subjects
Page
Versatile multi purpose
setting
Case 1
For any moving subject.
Tennis players, butterfly
swimmers, freestyle
skiers, etc.
Continue to track subjects,
ignoring possible obstacles
Case 2
Case 3
Starting line of a bicycle
race, alpine downhill
skiers, etc.
Instantly focus on subjects
suddenly entering AF points
For subjects that accelerate
or decelerate quickly
Soccer, motor sports,
basketball, etc.
Case 4
Case 5
Case 6
For erratic subjects moving
quickly in any direction
Figure skaters, etc.
For subjects that change
speed and move erratically
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
109
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 1: Versatile multi purpose setting
Standard setting suited for any moving
subject. Works with many subjects and
scenes.
Select [Case 2] to [Case 6] for the
following: When an obstacle cuts across
the AF points or the subject tends to
stray from the AF points, when you want
to focus on a subject appearing
suddenly, when the speed of a moving
subject changes suddenly, or when the
subject dramatically moves horizontally
or vertically.
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
• AF pt auto switching: 0
Case 2: Continue to track subjects, ignoring possible obstacles
The camera will try to continue focusing
on the subject even if an obstacle enters
the AF points or if the subject strays from
the AF points. Effective when there may
be an obstacle blocking the subject or
when you do not want to focus on the
background.
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: Locked on: -1
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
• AF pt auto switching: 0
If an obstacle gets in the way or if the subject moves away from the AF
points for a prolonged period and the default setting is unable to track the
target subject, setting [Tracking sensitivity] to [-2] may give better results
(p.114).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 3: Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering AF points
Once an AF point starts tracking the
subject, this setting enables the camera
to consecutively focus on subjects at
different distances. If a new subject
appears in front of the target subject, the
camera will start focusing on the new
subject. Also effective when you want to
Default settings
always focus on the closest subject.
•
Tracking sensitivity: Responsive: +1
• Accel./decel. tracking: +1
• AF pt auto switching: 0
If you want to quickly focus on a subject appearing suddenly, setting
Case 4: For subjects that accelerate or decelerate quickly
Geared for tracking moving subjects
whose speed can change dramatically
and suddenly.
Effective for subjects having sudden
movements, sudden acceleration,
sudden deceleration, or sudden stops.
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
•
Accel./decel. tracking: +1
• AF pt auto switching: 0
If the subject is in motion, and prone to sudden, dramatic changes in speed,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
111
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 5: For erratic subjects moving quickly in any direction
Even if the target subject moves
dramatically up, down, left, or right, the
AF point will switch automatically to
focus-track the subject. Effective for
shooting subjects that move dramatically
up, down, left, or right.
It is recommended to use this setting
with the following modes; AF point
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
• AF pt auto switching: +1
expansion (manual selection
), AF
point expansion (manual selection,
surrounding points), Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), and 61-point
automatic selection AF.
With Single-point Spot AF (manual
selection) or Single-point AF (manual
selection) mode, the tracking action will
be the same as with Case 1.
If the subject moves even more dramatically up, down, left, or right, setting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 6: For subjects that change speed and move erratically
Geared for tracking moving subjects
whose speed can change dramatically
and suddenly. Also, if the target subject
moves dramatically up, down, left or right
and it is difficult to focus, the AF point
switches automatically to track the
subject.
Default settings
It is recommended to use this setting
with the following modes; AF point
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
•
Accel./decel. tracking: +1
expansion (manual selection
), AF
• AF pt auto switching: +1
point expansion (manual selection,
surrounding points), Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), and 61-point
automatic selection AF.
With Single-point Spot AF (manual
selection) or Single-point AF (manual
selection) mode, the tracking action will
be the same as with Case 4.
If the subject is in motion, and prone to sudden, dramatic changes in
speed, setting [Accel./decel. tracking] to [+2] may give better results
If the subject moves even more dramatically up, down, left, or right,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
113
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Parameters
Tracking sensitivity
Sets the subject-tracking sensitivity
during AI Servo AF when an obstacle
enters the AF points or when the AF
points stray from the subject.
0
Default setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general.
Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1
The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an
obstacle enters the AF points or if the subject strays from the AF
points. The -2 setting makes the camera track the target subject
longer than with the -1 setting.
However, if the camera focuses on a wrong subject, it may take
slightly longer to switch and focus on the target subject.
Responsive: +2 / Responsive: +1
The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at different
distances that are covered by the AF points. Also effective when you
want to always focus on the closest subject. The +2 setting is more
responsive when focusing on the next subject than +1.
However, the camera will be more prone to focus on the wrong
subject.
[Tracking sensitivity] is the feature named [AI Servo tracking sensitivity]
in the EOS-1D Mark III/IV, EOS-1Ds Mark III, and EOS 7D.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Acceleration/deceleration tracking
This sets the tracking sensitivity for
moving subjects whose speed can
suddenly change dramatically by starting
or stopping suddenly, etc.
0
Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minimal change in
moving speed).
+2 / +1
Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden
acceleration/deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving
subject’s speed suddenly changes dramatically, the camera
continues to focus on the target subject. For example, for an
approaching subject, the camera becomes less prone to focus
behind it to avoid subject blur. For a subject stopping suddenly, the
camera becomes less prone to focus in front of it. Setting +2 can
track dramatic changes in the moving subject’s speed better than
with +1.
However, since the camera will be sensitive even to the slight
movements of the subject, the focusing may momentarily become
unstable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
115
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
AF point auto switching
This sets the switching sensitivity of the
AF points as they track the subject
moving dramatically up, down, left, or
right.
This setting takes effect when the AF
area selection mode is set to AF point
expansion (manual selection
), AF
point expansion (manual selection,
surrounding points), Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), or 61-point automatic
selection AF.
0
Standard setting for gradual AF point switching.
+2 / +1
Even if the target subject moves dramatically up, down, left, or right
and moves away from the AF point, the camera switches its focus to
neighboring AF points to continue focusing on the subject. The
camera switches to the AF point deemed most likely to focus on the
subject based on the subject’s continual movement, contrast, etc.
Setting +2 makes the camera more prone to switch the AF point
than with +1.
However, with a wide-angle lens having a wide depth of field or if the
subject is too small in the frame, the camera may focus with the
wrong AF point.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Changing Cases’ Parameter Settings
You can manually adjust each case’s three parameters: 1. Tracking
sensitivity, 2. Acceleration/deceleration tracking, and 3. AF point auto
switching.
Select a case.
Turn the <5> dial to select the icon
1
of the case you want to adjust.
Press the <c> button.
2
The selected parameter will have a
purple frame.
Select the parameter to adjust.
3
Select the parameter to adjust, then
press <0>.
When Tracking sensitivity is selected,
the setting screen will appear.
Make the adjustment.
4
Adjust the setting, then press <0>.
X The adjustment is saved.
The default setting is indicated by the
light gray [C] mark.
To return to the screen in step 1,
press the <c> button.
In step 2, if you press the <c> button and then press the <L>
button, you can revert the 1, 2 and 3 parameter settings above for each
case.
You can also register the 1, 2, and 3 parameter settings to My Menu
When shooting with a case whose parameters you adjusted, select the
adjusted case and then take the picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
117
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
With the [22] to [25] menu tabs, you
can set the AF functions to suit your
shooting style or subject.
22: AI Servo
AI Servo 1st image priority
You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing
for the first shot with AI Servo AF.
: Equal priority
Equal priority is given to focusing and
shutter release.
: Release priority
Pressing the shutter button takes the
picture immediately even if focus has
not been achieved. It is effective when
you want to give priority to capturing
the image rather than achieving focus.
: Focus priority
Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus is
achieved. Effective when you want to achieve focus before capturing
the image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AI Servo 2nd image priority
You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing
during continuous shooting after the first shot with AI Servo AF.
: Equal priority
Equal priority is given to focusing and
continuous shooting speed. In low
light or with low-contrast subjects,
shooting speed may slow down.
: Shooting speed priority
Priority is given to the continuous shooting speed instead of
achieving focus.
: Focus priority
Priority is given to achieving focus instead of the continuous
shooting speed. The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved.
if [Shooting speed priority] is set, the continuous shooting speed may
become slightly slower or the shooting interval may become irregular.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
119
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
23: One Shot
Lens electronic MF
With the following USM and STM lenses equipped with an electronic
manual focusing function, you can set whether to use electronic manual
focusing.
EF50mm f/1.0L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L II USM
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
EF600mm f/4L USM
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM
EF40mm f/2.8 STM
* As of March 2015
EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
: Enable after One-Shot AF
After AF operates, if you keep
pressing the shutter button halfway,
you can adjust the focus manually.
: Disable after One-Shot AF
After AF operates, manual focusing
adjustment is disabled.
OFF: Disable in AF mode
When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>, manual focusing
is disabled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF-assist beam firing
Enables or disables the AF-assist beam from the EOS-dedicated
external Speedlite.
ON: Enable
The external Speedlite emits the AF-
assist beam when necessary.
OFF: Disable
The external Speedlite will not emit
the AF-assist beam. Prevents the AF-
assist beam from disturbing others.
IR: IR AF assist beam only
When an external Speedlite is attached, only the infrared AF-assist
beam will be emitted. This prevents the AF-assist light from firing as
a burst of small flashes.
With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED
light will not automatically turn on for AF-assist.
If an external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set to
[Disabled], the Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam regardless of this
setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
121
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
One-Shot AF release priority
You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing
for One-Shot AF.
: Focus priority
The picture will not be taken until
focus is achieved. Effective when you
want to achieve focus before
capturing the shot.
: Release priority
Priority is given to the timing of
shutter release instead of achieving
focus. This gives priority to capturing
the image rather than achieving
correct focus.
Note that the picture will be taken
even if focus has not been
achieved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
24
Lens drive when AF impossible
If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, you can have the camera
keep searching for the correct focus or have it stop searching.
ON: Continue focus search
If focus cannot be achieved with
autofocus, the lens is driven to search
for the correct focus.
OFF: Stop focus search
If autofocus starts and the focus is far
off or if focus cannot be achieved, the
lens drive will not be performed. This
prevents the lens from becoming
grossly out of focus due to focus
searching.
Super telephoto lenses, etc., with a wide focusing drive range can become
grossly out of focus during focus search, taking more time to achieve focus
next time. Setting [Stop focus search] is recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
123
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Selectable AF point
You can change the number of manually selectable AF points. If 61-
point automatic selection AF is set, the Area AF frame (entire AF area)
will be used for AF regardless of the setting below.
: 61 points
All AF points will be manually
selectable.
: Only cross-type AF points
Only cross-type AF points will be
manually selectable. The number of
selectable cross-type AF points will
differ depending on the lens.
: 15 points
Fifteen major AF points will be
manually selectable.
: 9 points
Nine major AF points will be manually
selectable.
selectable AF points will be fewer.
Even with settings other than [61 points], AF point expansion (manual
selection ), AF point expansion (manual selection, surrounding points)
and Zone AF (manual selection of zone) are still possible.
When you press the <S> button, the AF points which are not manually
selectable will not be displayed in the viewfinder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Select AF area selection mode
You can limit the selectable AF area selection modes to suit your
shooting preferences. Select the desired selection mode and press
<0> to append a checkmark <X>. Then select [OK] to register the
setting.
: Manual select.:Spot AF
For pinpoint focusing with a narrower
area than single-point AF (manual
selection).
: Manual selection:1 pt AF
One of the AF points set by
[Selectable AF point] setting can be
selected.
: Expand AF area:
The camera will focus with the manually-selected AF point and the
adjacent AF points (above, below, on the left, and on the right).
: Expand AF area:Surround
The camera will focus with the manually-selected AF point and the
surrounding AF points.
: Manual select.:Zone AF
The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing.
: Auto selection:61 pt AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used for focusing.
The <X> mark cannot be removed from [Manual selection:1 pt AF].
[Manual select.:Spot AF], [Manual selection:1 pt AF], and [Expand
AF area: ].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
125
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF area selection method
You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode.
9 M-Fn button
After you press the <S> button,
pressing the <B> button, the AF
area selection mode changes.
9 Main Dial
After you press the <S> button,
turning the <6> dial changes the
AF area selection mode.
When [S 9 Main Dial] is set, use the <9> to move the AF point
horizontally.
Orientation linked AF point
You can set the AF point or the AF area selection mode + AF point
separately for vertical shooting and horizontal shooting.
: Same for both vert/horiz
The same AF area selection mode
and manually-selected AF point (or
zone) are used for both vertical
shooting and horizontal shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
: Separate AF pts: Area+pt
The AF area selection mode and AF point (or zone) can be set
separately for each camera orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with
the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical with the camera grip at the
bottom).
When you manually select the AF area selection mode and AF point (or
zone) for each of the three camera orientations, they will be set for the
respective orientation. Whenever you change the camera orientation
during shooting, the camera will switch to the AF area selection mode
and manually-selected AF point (or zone) set for that orientation.
: Separate AF pts: Pt only
The AF point can be set separately for each camera orientation
(1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical
with the camera grip at the bottom). While using the same AF area
selection mode, the AF point will switch automatically for the
respective camera orientation.
When you manually select the AF point for each of the three camera
orientations, it will be recorded for the respective orientation. During
shooting, the manually-selected AF point will switch to match the
respective camera orientation. Even if you change the AF area
selection mode to Manual select.:Spot AF, Manual selection:1 pt AF,
Expand AF area: , or Expand AF area:Surround, the AF point set
for the respective orientation will be retained.
If you change the AF area selection mode to Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), the zone will switch to match the respective
camera orientation.
[Same for both vert/horiz]. Also, your settings for the three camera
orientations (1, 2 and 3) will be cleared and all three will revert to Single-
point AF (Manual selection) with the center AF point selected.
104, particularly Group H), the setting may be cleared.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
127
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Initial AF Point,
AI Servo AF
You can set the AI Servo AF’s starting AF point for when the AF area
selection mode is set to Auto selection: 61 pt AF.
: Initial
AF pt selected
AI Servo AF will start with the
manually-selected AF point when the
AF operation is set to AI Servo AF
and the AF area selection mode is set
to Auto selection: 61 pt AF.
: Manual
AF pt
If you switch from Manual select.:Spot AF, Manual selection:1 pt AF,
Expand AF area: , or Expand AF area:Surround to Auto selection:
61 pt AF, AI Servo AF will start with the AF point that was manually
selected before the switch. Convenient if you want AI Servo AF to
start with the AF point which was selected before the AF area
selection mode was switched to Auto selection: 61 pt AF.
After you set the AF area selection mode to Auto selection: 61 pt AF
with the [83: Custom Controls] menu’s [Metering and AF start]
during Manual select: Spot AF, Manual selection: 1 pt AF, Expand
AF area: , or Expand AF area: Surround to switch to AI Servo AF
using Auto selection: 61 pt AF instead of the AF point used
immediately before.
AUTO: Auto
The AF point which AI Servo AF starts with is set automatically to
suit the shooting conditions.
When [Manual
AF pt] is set, AI Servo AF will start with the zone
that corresponds to the manually selected AF point, even if you switch AF
area selection mode to Zone AF (manual selection of zone).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Auto AF point selection: EOS iTR AF
EOS iTR* AF executes autofocus by recognizing faces and subject
colors. EOS iTR AF works when the AF area selection mode is set to
61-point automatic selection AF or Zone AF (manual selection of zone).
* intelligent Tracking and Recognition: The function that the metering sensor
identifies the subject to make the AF points tracking it.
ON: Enable
The AF point is automatically
selected based not only on AF
information, but also faces and other
details.
In AI Servo AF mode, the camera remembers the color at the position
it focused on first, then continues to track and focus on the subject by
switching AF points to track that color. This makes it easier to keep
track of the subject than when only AF information is available.
In One-Shot AF mode, EOS iTR AF makes focusing on people
easier, so you can perform shooting with priority on composition.
OFF: Disable
AF points are automatically selected based only on AF information.
(The AF will not use information about faces, subject colors and
other details.)
If [Enable] is set, the camera may take longer to focus than when
[Disable] is set.
Even if you set [Enable], expected result may not be obtained depending
on the shooting conditions and subject.
Under light so low that the EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite emits the
AF-assist beam automatically, AF points are selected automatically
based only on AF information.
Face detection may not work if the face is small or under low-light
conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
129
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
25
Manual AF point selection pattern
During manual AF point selection, the selection can either stop at the
outer edge or it can cycle around to the opposite side. This function
works in AF area selection modes other than Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), and 61-point automatic selection AF (works with AI
Servo AF).
: Stops at AF area edges
Convenient if you often use an AF
point at the periphery.
: Continuous
Instead of stopping at the outer edge,
the selection of AF point continues to
the opposite side.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF point display during focus
You can set whether or not to display the AF point(s) in the following
cases: 1. When selecting the AF point(s), 2. When the camera is ready
to shoot (before AF operation), 3. During AF operation, and 4. When
focus is achieved.
: Selected (constant)
The selected AF point(s) is always
displayed.
: All (constant)
All AF points are always displayed.
: Selected (pre-AF, focused)
The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1, 2, and 4.
: Selected (focused)
The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1 and 4 and for when AF
starts.
OFF: Disable display
For 2, 3, and 4, the selected AF point(s) will not be displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
131
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
VF display illumination
You can set whether the AF points in the viewfinder are to light up in red
when focus is achieved.
AUTO: Auto
The AF points automatically light up
in red under low light.
ON: Enable
The AF points light up in red
regardless of the ambient light level.
OFF: Disable
The AF points do not light up in red.
With [Auto] or [Enable] set, you can set whether the AF point lights up
in red (blink) when you press the <Q> button during AI Servo AF.
OFF: Non illuminated
The AF point will not light up during AI
Servo AF.
ON: Illuminated
AF points used for focusing light up in
red during AI Servo AF. This will not
work if [VF display illumination] is
set to [Disable].
When you press the <S> button, the AF points will light up in red
regardless of this setting.
The electronic level and grid in the viewfinder and the information set
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF Microadjustment
You can make fine adjustments for the AF’s point of focus. For details,
see “Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus” on the next page.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
133
3
Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Fine adjustment of the AF’s point of focus is possible for viewfinder
shooting. This is called “AF Microadjustment”. Before making the
adjustment, read “General Cautions for AF Microadjustment” on page
139.
Cautions for AF Microadjustment
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this adjustment
only if necessary. Note that performing this adjustment may prevent
accurate focusing from being achieved.
Adjust All by Same Amount
Set the adjustment manually by adjusting, shooting, and checking the
result. Repeat this until appropriate adjustment is made. During AF,
regardless of the lens used, the point of focus will always be shifted by
the adjustment amount.
Select [AF Microadjustment].
1
Under the [25] tab, select [AF
Microadjustment], then press <0>.
Select [All by same amount].
2
Press the <B> button.
3
X The [All by same amount] screen
will appear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Make the adjustment.
4
Set the adjustment amount. The
adjustable range is ±20 steps.
Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the
point of focus in front of the standard
point of focus.
Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the
point of focus to the rear of the
standard point of focus.
After making the adjustment, press
<0>.
Select [All by same amount], then
press <0>.
Check the result of the
5 adjustment.
Take a picture and play back the
adjustment result.
If the shooting result comes out with
focus in front of the targeted point,
adjust toward the “+: ” side. If it
comes out with focus behind the
targeted point, adjust toward the
“-: ” side.
If necessary, repeat the adjustment.
If [All by same amount] is selected, separate AF adjustment will not be
possible for the wide-angle and telephoto ends of zoom lenses.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
135
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Adjust by Lens
You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment
in the camera. You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses.
When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment is registered, the
point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.
Set the adjustment manually by adjusting, shooting, and checking the
result. Repeat this until the desired adjustment is made. If you use a zoom
lens, make the adjustment for the wide-angle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.
Select [Adjust by lens].
1
Press the <B> button.
2
X The [Adjust by lens] screen will
appear.
Check and change the lens
3 information.
Checking the Lens Information.
Press the <B> button.
X The screen will show the lens name
and a 10-digit serial number. When
the serial number is displayed, select
[OK] and go to step 4.
If the lens’s serial number cannot be
confirmed, “0000000000” will be
Registered number
displayed. In this case, enter the
number by following the instructions
on the next page.
Regarding the asterisk “ * ” displayed
in front of some lens serial numbers,
see the next page.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Entering the Serial Number
Select the digit to be entered, then
press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Enter the number, then press <0>.
After entering all the digits, select
[OK].
Lens Serial Number
In step 3, if “ * ” appears in front of the 10-digit lens serial
number, you can register only one unit of the same lens model.
Even if you enter the serial number, “ * ” will remain displayed.
The serial number on the lens may differ from the serial number
displayed on the screen in step 3. This is not a malfunction.
If the lens serial number includes letters, enter only the numbers.
If the lens serial number is eleven digits or longer, enter only the last
ten digits.
The location of the serial number varies depending on the lens.
Some lenses may not have a serial number inscribed. To register a
lens that has no serial number inscribed, enter any serial number.
If [Adjust by lens] is selected and an Extender is used, the adjustment
will be registered for the lens and Extender combination.
If 40 lenses have already been registered, a message will appear. After
you select a lens whose registration is to be erased (overwritten), you
can register another lens.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
137
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Single focal length lens
Make the adjustment.
4
For a zoom lens, select the wide-angle
(W) or telephoto (T) end. Pressing
<0
> will turn off the purple frame and
make the adjustment possible.
Set the adjustment amount, then
press <0>. The adjustable range is
±20 steps.
Zoom lens
Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the
point of focus in front of the standard
point of focus.
Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the
point of focus to the rear of the
standard point of focus.
For a zoom lens, repeat this
procedure and adjust it for the wide-
angle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.
After completing the adjustment,
press the <M> button to return to
the screen in step 1.
Select [Adjust by lens], then press
<0>.
Check the result of the adjustment.
5
Take a picture and play back the
adjustment result.
If the shooting result comes out with
focus in front of the targeted point,
adjust toward the “+: ” side. If it
comes out with focus behind the
targeted point, adjust toward the
“-: ” side.
If necessary, repeat the adjustment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
When shooting with the intermediate range (focal length) of a zoom lens, the
AF’s point of focus is corrected automatically relative to the adjustments
made for the wide-angle and telephoto ends. Even if only the wide-angle or
telephoto end is adjusted, a correction will be made automatically for the
intermediate range.
Clearing All AF Microadjustments
When [ Clear all] appears at the bottom of the screen, pressing the
<L> button will clear all the adjustments made for [All by same
amount] and [Adjust by lens].
General Cautions for AF Microadjustment
The AF’s point of focus will vary slightly depending on the subject
conditions, brightness, zoom position, and other shooting conditions.
Therefore, even if you perform AF Microadjustment, focus may still not
be achieved at the suitable position.
The adjustment amount of one stop varies depending on the maximum
aperture of the lens. Keep adjusting, shooting, and checking the focus
repeatedly to adjust the AF’s point of focus.
The adjustment will not be applied to AF during Live View shooting or
movie shooting.
The adjustments will be retained even if you clear all the camera settings
Notes for AF Microadjustment
It is best to make the adjustment at the actual location where you will
shoot. This will make the adjustment more precise.
Using a tripod when making the adjustment is recommended.
For making adjustments, shooting at the 73 image-recording quality is
recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
139
When Autofocus Fails
Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus indicator <o>
blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:
Subjects Difficult to Focus
Subjects with very low contrast
(Example: Blue skies, solid-color flat surfaces, etc.)
Subjects in very low light
Strongly backlit or reflective subjects
(Example: Cars with highly reflective bodies, etc.)
Near and distant subjects framed close to an AF point
(Example: Animals in cages, etc.)
Subjects such as dots of light framed close to an AF point
(Example: Night scenes, etc.)
Repetitive patterns
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)
In such cases, focus by doing either of the following:
(1) With One-Shot AF, focus on an object at the same distance as the
(2) Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually
Depending on the subject, focus may be achieved by slightly
recomposing the shot and performing AF operation again.
For conditions where AF can fail to achieve focus with [u+Tracking]/
[FlexiZone - Single] during Live View shooting or movie shooting, see
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140
When Autofocus Fails
MF: Manual Focus
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <MF>.
X <4 L> will be displayed on the
1
LCD panel.
Focus on the subject.
2
Focusing ring
Focus by turning the lens’s focusing
ring until the subject looks sharp in
the viewfinder.
If you press the shutter button halfway while focusing manually, the focus
indicator <o> will light up when focus is achieved.
With 61-point automatic selection AF, when the center AF point achieves
focus, the focus indicator <o> will light up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
141
o Selecting the Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the
drive mode suiting the scene or subject.
Press the <o> button. (9)
1
Select the drive mode.
2
While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <5> dial.
u : Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will
be taken.
o: High-speed continuous shooting
While you hold down the shutter button completely, the camera
will shoot continuously at a maximum of approx. 5.0 shots/sec.
i : Low-speed continuous shooting
While you hold down the shutter button completely, the camera
will shoot continuously at a maximum of approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
B : Silent single shooting
Single shooting with less shooting sound than <u> during
viewfinder shooting.
M : Silent continuous shooting
Continuous shooting with less shooting sound than <i> during
viewfinder shooting. The camera will shoot continuously at a
maximum of approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
During Live View shooting and movie shooting, shooting will not be silent
even if <B> or <M> is set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142
o Selecting the Drive Mode
Q : 10-sec. self-timer/remote control
k: 2-sec. self-timer/remote control
shooting, see page 237.
o: The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 5.0 shots/sec.
is attained under the following conditions*: 1/500 sec. or faster shutter
speed, maximum aperture (varies depending on the lens), Anti-flicker
shooting set to Disable, with a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, and at
room temperature (23°C/73°F). The continuous shooting speed may
become slower depending on the shutter speed, aperture, subject
conditions, brightness, lens, flash use, temperature, battery type,
remaining battery level, etc.
*
With the AF mode set to One-Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off
when using the following lenses: EF300mm f/4L IS USM, EF28-135mm f/3.5-
5.6 IS USM, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM.
In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become
slower depending on the subject and the lens used.
If you use Battery Pack LP-E6 and shoot in low temperatures (battery
temperature is low), the high-speed continuous shooting speed may
become slower.
The continuous shooting speed may become slower if the remaining
battery level is low or if you shoot under low-light conditions.
If you use Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately) with AA/R6 batteries,
the maximum continuous shooting speed will be approx. 3.0 fps for high-
speed continuous shooting.
a flickering light source, the continuous shooting speed may decrease
slightly, the shooting interval may become irregular, or the release
timelag may become longer.
If <B> or <M> is set, the time lag from when you press the shutter
button completely until the picture is shot will be longer than standard.
If the [51: Record func+card/folder sel.] menu’s [Record func.] is set
decrease.
When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the
continuous shooting speed may drop during shooting since shooting will
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
143
j Using the Self-timer
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture.
Press the <o> button. (9)
1
2
Select the self-timer.
While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <5> dial.
Q : 10-sec. self-timer
k: 2-sec. self-timer
Take the picture.
3
Look through the viewfinder, focus on
the subject, then press the shutter
button completely.
X You can check the self-timer
operation with the self-timer lamp,
beeper, and countdown display (in
seconds) on the LCD panel.
X 2 sec. before the picture is taken, the
self-timer lamp will light up and the
beeper will sound faster.
If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button,
the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
The <k> enables you to shoot while not touching the camera
mounted on a tripod. This prevents camera shake when you shoot still
lifes or long exposures.
focus and exposure is recommended.
object at the same distance as where you will stand.
To cancel the self-timer, press the <o> button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144
4
Image Settings
This chapter explains image-related function settings:
Image-recording quality, Crop/aspect, ISO speed,
Picture Style, white balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer,
noise reduction, highlight tone priority, lens aberration
correction, anti-flicker shooting, and other functions.
A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in the following modes: <d>
<s> <f> <a> <F>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
145
3
Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback
If either a CF card or SD card is already inserted in the camera, you
can start recording captured images. When only one card is
inserted, you do not have to follow the procedures described on
If you insert both a CF card and SD card, you can select the recording
method and select which card to use for recording and playing back
images.
[f] indicates the CF card, and [g] the SD card.
Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted
Select [Record func+card/folder
sel.].
Under the [51] tab, select [Record
func+card/folder sel.], then press
<0>.
1
Select [Record func.].
2
Select the recording method.
3
Select the recording method, then
press <0>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146
3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback
Standard
Images will be recorded to the card selected with [Record/play].
Auto switch card
Same as with the [Standard] setting, but if the card becomes full,
the camera will automatically switch to the other card to record
images. When the card is automatically switched, a new folder will
be created.
Rec. separately
image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards at the image-
recording quality you set. You can freely set the image-recording
quality, such as to 73 and 1, or c and 41.
Rec. to multiple
Each image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards simultaneously
at the same image size. You can also select RAW+JPEG.
If [Rec. separately] is set and different recording qualities are set for the
CF card and SD card, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
Even if [Record func.] is set to [Rec. to multiple], movies cannot be
recorded to both the CF card and SD card at the same time. If [Rec.
separately] or [Rec. to multiple] is set, the movie will be recorded to the
card which is set for [Playback].
[Rec. separately] and [Rec. to multiple]
The same file number is used for recording to both the CF card and SD
card.
The LCD panel will display the number of possible shots of the card
having the lower number.
If one of the cards becomes full, [Card* full] will be displayed and
shooting will be disabled. If this happens, either replace the card or set
[Record func.] to [Standard] or [Auto switch card], and select the card
with remaining capacity to continue shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
147
3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback
Selecting the CF or SD Card for Recording and Playback
If [Record func.] is set to [Standard] or [Auto switch card], select the
card for recording and playing back images.
If [Record func.] is set to [Rec. separately] or [Rec. to multiple],
select the card for playing back images.
Standard / Auto switch card
Select [Record/play].
Select [Record/play], then press
<0>.
f: Record images to and play
images back from the CF
card.
g : Record images to and play
images back from the SD
card.
Select the card, then press <0>.
Rec. separately / Rec. to multiple
Select [Playback].
Select [Playback], then press <0>.
f: Play back the CF card’s
images.
g : Play back the SD card’s
images.
Select the card, then press <0>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
You can select the pixel count and the image quality. There are ten
JPEG image-recording quality settings: 73, 83, 7K, 8K, 75,
85, 7a, 8a, b, c. There are three RAW image quality settings:
Select [Image quality].
1
Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
quality], then press <0>.
Select the image-recording quality.
Standard / Auto switch
card / Rec. to multiple
2
To select a RAW quality, turn the
<6> dial. To select a JPEG quality,
turn the <5> dial.
On the upper right, the “**M
(megapixels) ****x****” number
indicates the recorded pixel count,
and [***] is the number of possible
shots (displayed up to 9999).
Press <0> to set it.
Rec. separately
Under [51: Record func+card/
folder sel.], if [Record func.] is set to
[Rec. separately], select CF card
[f] or SD card [g], then press
<0>.
Select the desired image-recording
quality, then press <0>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
149
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Image-recording Quality Setting Examples
73 only
1 only
1+73
61+7K
The image size [****x****] and number of possible shots [****] displayed on
the Image-recording quality setting screen always apply to the [Full-frame]
number of possible shots displayed on the LCD panel and Live View
shooting screen during shooting is based on the [z4: Crop/aspect ratio]
setting.
If [–] is set for both RAW and JPEG, 73 will be set.
The number of possible shots will be displayed up to 1999 on the LCD
panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Guide to Image-Recording Quality Settings (Approx.)
Image
Quality
Pixels
Recorded
Print
Size
File Size
(MB)
Possible
Shots
Maximum
Burst
73
14.1
7.0
510
1030
660
31 (510)
1030 (1030)
45 (660)
50M
39M
22M
12M
83
A1
7K
8K
75
10.9
5.5
1310
1010
2030
1590
3120
5600
20380
100
1310 (1310)
1010 (1010)
2030 (2030)
1590 (1590)
3120 (3120)
5600 (5600)
20380 (20380)
12 (14)
7.1
JPEG
A2
A3
85
7a
8a
3.5
4.5
2.3
*1
b
2.5M
0.3M
50M
28M
12M
9x13 cm
1.2
*2
c
-
0.3
1
RAW 41
61
A1
A2
A3
60.5
44.0
29.8
140
12 (14)
190
14 (15)
1
73
50M
50M
A1
A1
60.5+14.1
44.0+14.1
29.8+14.1
87
12 (12)
11 (12)
14 (14)
RAW
41
+
28M
50M
A2
A1
110
140
73
JPEG
61
73
12M
50M
A3
A1
*1: b is suitable for playing back the images on a digital photo frame.
*2: c is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a Web site.
b and c will be in 7 (Fine) quality.
The file size, possible shots, and maximum burst during continuous shooting
are based on Canon’s testing standards (Crop/aspect ratio: Full-frame, ISO
100 and Standard Picture Style) using an 8 GB CF card. These figures will
vary by the subject, card brand, crop/aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture
Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.
The maximum burst applies to <o> high-speed continuous shooting.
Figures in parentheses apply to an Ultra DMA (UDMA) 7 CF card, based on
Canon’s testing standards.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
151
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Even if you use a UDMA card, the maximum burst indicator remains the
same. However, the maximum burst in parentheses on the preceding
page will be applied during continuous shooting.
If you select both RAW and JPEG, the same image will be recorded
simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the image-
recording qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded with
the same file numbers (file extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for RAW).
The image-recording quality icons are as follows: 1 (RAW), 41
(Medium RAW), 61 (Small RAW), JPEG (JPEG), 7 (Fine), 8
(Normal), 3 (Large), 4 (Medium), and 6 (Small).
RAW Images
A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to
digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the
quality as follows: 1, 41, or 61.
A 1 image can be processed with [31: RAW image processing]
be processed with the camera.) As the RAW image itself does not
change, you can process the RAW image according to different
processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.520) to
process RAW images. You can make various adjustments as desired
and generate a JPEG, TIFF, etc., image incorporating those
adjustments.
RAW Image Processing Software
To display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional
(DPP, EOS software) is recommended.
Previous DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken with this
camera. If your computer has the previous DPP Ver.4.x, update it with
overwritten.) Note that DPP Ver.3.x or earlier cannot process RAW
images taken with this camera.
Commercially-available software may not be able to display RAW
images taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the
software manufacturer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
One-touch Image Quality Setting
With Custom Controls, you can assign the image-recording quality to
the <B> button or depth-of-field preview button so you can switch
to it momentarily. If you assign [One-touch image quality setting] or
[One-touch image quality (hold)] to the <B> button or depth-of-
field preview button, you can quickly switch to the desired image-
recording quality and shoot.
Under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.], if [Record func.] is set to [Rec.
separately], you cannot switch to the One-touch image quality setting.
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting
The approximate maximum burst is
displayed in the viewfinder, Quick
Control screen, and on the bottom right
of the Custom Quick Control screen.
If the maximum burst for continuous
shooting is 99 or higher, “99” will be
displayed.
The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the
camera. Make sure that a card is inserted before taking a picture.
If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99
or more shots continuously. If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or lower
and the internal buffer memory becomes full, “buSY” will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the LCD panel. Shooting will then be disabled temporarily.
If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase. After all
the captured images are written to the card, you can resume continuous
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
153
Setting Crop/Aspect RatioN
Normally, images are recorded at the sensor size of approx. 36.0 mm x
24.0 mm (full-frame shooting). You can record only the center of the
image magnified approx. 1.3x (equivalent to APS-H size) or approx.
1.6x (equivalent to APS-C size) as if you were using a telephoto lens
(crop shooting) or set the desired aspect ratio before you shoot.
Select [Crop/aspect ratio].
1
Under the [z4] tab, select [Crop/
aspect ratio], then press <0>.
Select the desired setting.
Viewfinder shooting
Select any of the following: [Full-
frame], [1.3x (crop)], [1.6x (crop)], or
[1:1 (aspect ratio)].
2
If you set [4:3 (aspect ratio)] or [16:9
(aspect ratio)] and use the
viewfinder to shoot, the shooting
result will be the same as with [Full-
frame].
You can select any setting.
If you will not change the shooting
area display, press <0> and go to
step 4.
Select the shooting area display.
3
With the screen in step 2 displayed,
press the <B> button.
Select either [Masked] or [Outlined],
then press <0>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154
Setting Crop/Aspect RatioN
Take the picture.
Viewfinder shooting
The shooting area in the viewfinder
will be masked or have frame lines.
The area surrounded by the semi-
transparent masking or frame lines
will be recorded as an image.
Example settings
4
With e•b
With f•c
Live View shooting
With d
When [1.3x (crop)] or [1.6x (crop)] is
set, the displayed image will be
magnified by approx. 1.3x or 1.6x
respectively.
Regardless of the [Shooting area]
setting, the area shown by the
displayed image will be recorded.
If you select [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3
(aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect
ratio)], the area surrounded by the
masking or frame lines will be
recorded as an image.
With g•b
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
155
Setting Crop/Aspect RatioN
The [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] setting does not work with movie shooting
and multiple exposures.
The 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratios cannot be used with viewfinder shooting.
[83: Add cropping information] can be set only when [Full-frame]
has been set for Crop/aspect ratio.
An external Speedlite’s flash zoom (automatic flash coverage) will not
work in tandem with the [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] setting.
The image coverage with viewfinder shooting will be as follows:
• With [1.3x (crop)]: Approx. 99% vertical/horizontal coverage.
• With [1.6x (crop)]: Approx. 98% vertical/horizontal coverage.
• With [1:1 (aspect ratio)]: Approx. 100% vertical and approx. 99%
horizontal coverage.
When the image-recording quality is RAW, the image will be recorded in
full-frame and the Crop/aspect ratio setting will be appended. During
RAW image playback, the shooting area will be indicated by frame lines
shooting area will appear.
If you use [83: Custom Controls] to assign [Switch between crop/
button during viewfinder shooting or Live View shooting to switch the
During Live View shooting, you can use the Quick Control screen to set
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156
Setting Crop/Aspect RatioN
Pixels Recorded in Crop/Aspect Ratio Settings
(Approx.)
1.6x (crop)
Image Quality
Full-frame (3:2)
1.3x (crop)
8688x5792
6768x4512
5424x3616
(19.6 megapixels)
3
(50.3 megapixels) (30.5 megapixels)
7680x5120 6016x4000*
(39.3 megapixels) (24.1 megapixels)
5760x3840 4512x3008
(22.1 megapixels) (13.6 megapixels)
4320x2880 3376x2256*
(12.4 megapixels) (7.6 megapixels)
4800x3200
(15.4 megapixels)
K
5
a
3616x2408*
(8.7 megapixels)
2704x1808*
(4.9 megapixels)
1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)
1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)
1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)
b
c
720x480
(350,000 pixels)
720x480
(350,000 pixels)
720x480
(350,000 pixels)
(Approx.)
Image Quality 1:1 (aspect ratio) 4:3 (aspect ratio) 16:9 (aspect ratio)
5792x5792
(33.5 megapixels) (44.7 megapixels)
7712x5792*
8688x4888*
(42.5 megapixels)
3
K
5
a
5120x5120 6816x5120*
(26.2 megapixels) (34.9 megapixels)
3840x3840 5120x3840
(14.7 megapixels) (19.7 megapixels)
2880x2880 3840x2880
(8.3 megapixels) (11.1 megapixels)
7680x4320
(33.2 megapixels)
5760x3240
(18.7 megapixels)
4320x2432*
(10.5 megapixels)
1280x1280
(1.6 megapixels)
1712x1280*
(2.2 megapixels)
1920x1080
(2.1 megapixels)
b
c
480x480
(230,000 pixels)
640x480
(310,000 pixels)
720x408*
(290,000 pixels)
The items marked with an asterisk do not exactly match the indicated
aspect ratio.
For JPEG image file sizes, see the figures for full-frame shooting on page
set will be smaller than an identical image taken with [Full-frame] set.
]
The file size and maximum burst of RAW images are the same as those
of full-frame shooting. See page 151.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
157
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the
ambient light level. With the <A> mode selected, the ISO speed will
be set automatically (p.160).
Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see pages 283 and
287.
Press the <m> button. (9)
1
Set the ISO speed.
While looking at the LCD panel or in
2
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
ISO speed can be set within ISO 100
- ISO 6400 in 1/3-stop increments.
“A” indicates Auto ISO. The ISO
speed will be set automatically
ISO Speed Guide
Shooting Situation
ISO speed
Flash Range
(No flash)
L, ISO 100 - ISO 400
ISO 400 - ISO 1600
ISO 1600 - ISO 6400, H
Sunny outdoors
The higher the ISO
speed, the farther the
flash range will be.
Overcast skies or
evening time
Dark indoors or night
* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
As H (equivalent to ISO 12800) is an expanded ISO speed setting, noise
(dots of light, banding, etc.) and irregular colors will be more noticeable,
and the resolution lower than usual.
As L (equivalent to ISO 50) is an expanded ISO speed setting, the
dynamic range will be somewhat narrower than usual.
to ISO 50), ISO 100/125/160, and H (equivalent to ISO 12800) cannot be
selected.
Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier.
Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise,
such as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long
exposure, images may not be recorded properly.
If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,
overexposure may result.
Under [z2: ISO speed settings], you can use [ISO speed range] to
expand the settable ISO speed range from L (equivalent to ISO 50) to H
(equivalent to ISO 12800) (p.161).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
159
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
Auto ISO
If the ISO speed is set to “A” (Auto), the
actual ISO speed to be set will be
displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway.
As indicated below, the ISO speed will
be set automatically to suit the shooting
mode.
ISO Speed Setting
Shooting Mode
No Flash
ISO 100 - ISO 3200
With Flash
ISO 100 - ISO 1600
A
d/s/f/a
ISO 100 - ISO 6400*1
ISO 400*1
ISO 400*1*2*3
F
*1: The actual ISO speed range depends on the [Minimum] and [Maximum]
settings set in [Auto ISO range].
*2: If fill flash will cause overexposure, ISO speed may be reduced, down to a
possible minimum of ISO 100 (except in the <a> and <F> modes).
*3: In the <d> mode, if the external Speedlite is set for bounce flash, ISO 400 -
ISO 1600 will be set automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
3 Setting the Manually-Settable ISO Speed Range
You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and
maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within L (equivalent to
ISO 50) to ISO 6400, and the maximum limit within ISO 100 to H
(equivalent to ISO 12800).
Select [ISO speed settings].
1
Under the [z2] tab, select [ISO
speed settings], then press <0>.
Select [ISO speed range].
2
Set the minimum limit.
3
Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
Set the maximum limit.
4
Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
Select [OK].
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
161
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
3 Setting the ISO Speed Range for Auto ISO
You can set the automatic ISO speed range for Auto ISO within ISO 100
- ISO 6400. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 - ISO 3200,
and the maximum limit within ISO 200 - ISO 6400 in 1-stop increments.
Select [Auto ISO range].
1
Set the minimum limit.
2
Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
Set the maximum limit.
3
Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
Select [OK].
4
The [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also be applied to the ISO
speed safety shift’s minimum and maximum ISO speeds (p.405).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
3 Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for Auto ISO
You can set the minimum shutter speed so that the shutter speed set
automatically will not be too slow when Auto ISO is set.
This is convenient in the <d> and <f> modes when you use a wide-
angle lens to shoot a moving subject or when you use a telephoto lens.
It helps to reduce camera shake and blurred subjects.
Select [Min. shutter spd.].
1
Set the desired minimum shutter
Automatically set
2 speed.
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
If you select [Auto], turn the <6>
dial to set the desired speed, slower
or faster, compared to the standard
speed, then press <0>.
If you select [Manual], turn the <6>
dial to select the shutter speed, then
press <0>.
Manually set
If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed
limit set with [Auto ISO range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min.
shutter spd.] will be set to obtain a standard exposure.
This function will not be applied to flash and movie shooting.
When [Auto: 0] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the reciprocal of
the lens focal length. A single step from [Slower] to [Faster] is equivalent to
a single shutter speed stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
163
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
matching your photographic expression or the subject.
The Picture Style is set automatically to [D] (Auto) in the <A>
mode.
Press the <b> button.
1
Select [A].
X The Picture Style selection screen will
2
appear.
Select a Picture Style.
3
X The Picture Style will be set and the
camera will be ready to shoot.
You can also select the Picture Style with [z3: Picture Style].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
Picture Style Characteristics
D Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The
colors will look vivid, especially for blue skies, greenery and sunsets,
and in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes.
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture
Style.
P Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
Q Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up
portraits.
R Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.
Effective for impressive landscapes.
u Fine Detail
Suited for detailed outline and fine texture description of the subject.
The colors will be slightly vivid.
S Neutral
Suited for processing the image with a computer. For natural colors
and subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
165
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
U Faithful
Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a
subject that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K
will be adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For
subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
V Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot be turned into color. If you
want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the [Monochrome] setting is
canceled.
W User Def. 1-3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a
Defined Picture Style that is not set will have the same settings as
the [Standard] Picture Style.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
Symbols
The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness],
or [Threshold] of [Sharpness], [Contrast], and other parameters. The
numerals indicate the set values for these parameters as set by the
respective Picture Style.
Symbols
Sharpness
A
B
C
Strength
Fineness
Threshold
g
h
i
j
k
l
Contrast
Saturation
Color tone
Filter effect (Monochrome)
Toning effect (Monochrome)
[Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] will not be applied to movies.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
167
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
You can customize the Picture Styles. You can change or adjust the
parameter settings of Picture Styles such as [Strength], [Fineness], or
[Threshold] of [Sharpness], and [Contrast], and other parameters
from the default settings. To see the resulting effects, take test shots. To
Press the <b> button.
1
2
Select [A].
X The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
Select a Picture Style.
3
Select a Picture Style, then press
<B> button.
Select a parameter.
4
Select the parameter (such as
[Sharpness] - [Strength]) to be set,
then press <0>.
The settings and effects are
explained on page 170.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
Set the parameter.
Adjust the parameter as desired, then
press <0>.
5
Press the <M> button to save the
adjusted parameters. The Picture
Style selection screen will reappear.
X Any parameter settings different from
the default will be displayed in blue.
By selecting [Default set.] in step 4, you can revert the parameter
settings of the respective Picture Style to its default.
To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted
Picture Style, then shoot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
169
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
Parameter Settings and Effects
Sharpness
A
B
C
Strength
0: Less sharp outline
1: Fine
7: Sharp outline
5: Coarse
g
1
Fineness*
2
Threshold* 1: Low
5: High
h
i
j
Contrast
-4: Low contrast
+4: High contrast
+4: High saturation
+4: Yellowish skin tone
Saturation
Color tone
-4: Low saturation
-4: Reddish skin tone
*1: Indicates the fineness of the outlines to be emphasized. The smaller the
number, the finer the outlines can be emphasized.
*2: Sets how much the outline is emphasized based on the difference in contrast
between the subject and the surrounding area. The smaller the number, the
more the outline will be emphasized when the contrast difference is low.
However, noise at high ISO speeds tends to be more noticeable when the
number is smaller.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
V Monochrome Adjustment
Besides [Strength], [Fineness], or [Threshold] of [Sharpness] and
[Contrast], you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect].
kFilter effect
With a filter effect applied to a
monochrome image, you can make
white clouds or green trees stand out
more.
Filter
Sample Effects
N: None
Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Ye: Yellow
Or: Orange
R: Red
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
G: Green
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
lToning effect
By applying a toning effect, you can
create a monochrome image in that
color. It can make the image look more
impressive.
The following can be selected: [N:None],
[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or
[G:Green].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
171
A Registering a Picture StyleN
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3]. You can create multiple Picture Styles
with different settings for parameters such as sharpness and contrast.
You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that is registered
Press the <b> button.
1
2
Select [A].
X The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
Select [User Def. *].
3
Select [User Def. *], then press
<B> button.
Press <0>.
With [Picture Style] selected, press
4
<0>.
Select the base Picture Style.
5
Select the base Picture Style, then
press <0>.
To adjust the parameters of a Picture
Style that is registered to the camera
with EOS Utility (EOS software), select
the Picture Style here.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172
A Registering a Picture StyleN
Select a parameter.
6
7
Select the parameter (such as
[Sharpness] - [Strength]) to be set,
then press <0>.
Set the parameter.
Adjust the parameter as desired, then
press <0>.
For details, see “Customizing a
Press the <M> button to register
the modified Picture Style. The
Picture Style selection screen will
then reappear.
X The base Picture Style will be
indicated on the right of [User Def. *].
If a Picture Style has already been registered under [User Def. *],
changing the base Picture Style in step 5 will nullify the parameter
settings of the registered Picture Style.
styles and settings will revert to their defaults. Any Picture Style
registered via EOS Utility (EOS software) will have only its modified
parameters reverted to the default setting.
To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, select the registered [User
Def. *], then shoot.
Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
173
B: Setting the White BalanceN
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally,
the Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) or [Qw] (White priority) setting will
obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be
obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light
source or set it manually by shooting a white object.
<A> is automatically set in the [Q] (Ambience priority) mode.
Press the <n> button. (9)
1
Select a white balance setting.
2
While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <5> dial.
(Approx.)
Display
Mode
Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)
Q
3000-7000
Qw
Auto (White priority, p.175
)
W
E
R
Y
U
D
Daylight
5200
7000
Shade
Cloudy, twilight, sunset
Tungsten light
White fluorescent light
Flash use
6000
3200
4000
Automatically set*
2000-10000
2500-10000
O
P
Custom (p.176)
Color temperature (p.178)
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.
Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000 K.
You can also set this with [z2: White balance].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174
B: Setting the White BalanceN
White Balance
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of
lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is
decided depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and
then the color is adjusted with software to make the white areas look
white. With this function, pictures with natural color shades can be
taken.
Q Auto White Balance
With the standard [Q] (Ambience priority), you can increase the
intensity of the image’s warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light
scene. If you select [Qw] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity
of the image’s warm color cast.
If you want to match the Auto white balance of previous EOS DIGITAL
camera models, select [Q] (Ambience priority).
Select [White balance].
1
Under the [z2] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
Select <Q>.
Select <Q>, then press <B>
2
button.
Select the desired item.
3
Select [Auto: Ambience priority] or
[Auto: White priority], then press
<0>.
Q
Q
: Auto: Ambience priority
: Auto: White priority
w
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
175
B: Setting the White BalanceN
Cautions for Setting [Q
w] (White priority)
The reddish color cast of subjects may fade.
When multiple light sources are included on the screen, the red color
cast of the picture may not be lessened.
When using flash, the color tone will be the same as [Q] (Ambience
priority).
O Custom White Balance
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance
for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure
under the actual light source to be used.
Shoot a white object.
Look through the viewfinder and aim
1
the entire dotted line box (shown in
the illustration) over a plain, white
object.
Focus manually and shoot with the
standard exposure set for the white
object.
You can use any white balance
setting.
Select [Custom White Balance].
2
Under the [z2] tab, select [Custom
White Balance], then press <0>.
X The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176
B: Setting the White BalanceN
Import the white balance data.
3
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image captured in step 1, then press
<0>.
X On the dialog screen that appears,
select [OK] and the data will be
imported.
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
Press the <n> button. (9)
4
5
Select the custom white balance.
Look at the LCD panel and turn the
<5> dial to select <O>.
If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard
exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
In step 3, the following images cannot be selected: Images captured
while the Picture Style was set to [Monochrome], multiple-exposure
images, and images shot with another camera.
Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reflector
(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white balance.
The personal white balance registered with the EOS software will be
registered under <O>. If you perform step 3, the data for the registered
personal white balance will be erased.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
177
B: Setting the White BalanceN
P Setting the Color Temperature
You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically. This is
for advanced users.
Select [White balance].
1
Under the [z2] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
Set the color temperature.
Select [P].
Turn the <6> dial to set the color
temperature, then press <0>.
The color temperature can be set
from approx. 2500 K to 10000 K in
100 K increments.
2
When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set white
balance correction (magenta or green) as necessary.
If you set [P] to the reading taken with a commercially-available color
temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate
for the difference between the color temperature meter’s reading and the
camera’s color temperature reading.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178
u White Balance CorrectionN
You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have
the same effect as using a commercially-available color temperature
conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be
corrected to one of nine levels.
This function is for advanced users who are familiar with using color
temperature conversion or color compensating filters.
White Balance Correction
Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].
1
Under the [z2] tab, select [WB
Shift/Bkt.], then press <0>.
Set the white balance correction.
2
Use <9> to move the “ ” mark to the
appropriate position.
B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The image’s
color balance will be adjusted towards
the color in the direction of the move.
Sample setting: A2, G1
On the right of the screen, “Shift”
indicates the direction and correction
amount, respectively.
Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press <0> to exit the setting.
During the white balance correction, <u> will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
You can display <z> in the viewfinder when white balance correction is
One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating
the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
179
u White Balance CorrectionN
White Balance Auto Bracketing
With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be
recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current
white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber
bias or magenta/green bias. This is called white balance bracketing
(WB-BKT). White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in
single-level increments.
Set the white balance bracketing
amount.
In step 2 for “White Balance
Correction”, when you turn the <5>
dial, the “ ” mark on the screen will
change to “
” (3 points).
B/A bias ±3 levels
Turning the dial to the right sets the B/
A bracketing, and turning it to the left
sets the M/G bracketing.
X On the right, “Bracket” indicates the
bracketing direction and correction
amount.
Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press <0> to exit the setting.
Bracketing Sequence
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180
u White Balance CorrectionN
During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
be lower.
Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record
the image to the card.
You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
When white balance bracketing is set, the white balance icon will blink.
You can change the number of shots for white balance bracketing
(p.404).
“Bkt.” stands for bracketing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
181
3
Auto Correction of Brightness and ContrastN
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and
contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto
Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG
images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.
[Standard] is automatically set in the <A> mode.
Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
1
Under the [z2] tab, select [Auto
Lighting Optimizer], then press
<0>.
Select the setting.
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
2
3
Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with the
brightness and contrast corrected if
necessary.
Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.
If the Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and the image is too bright,
set [Low] or [Disable].
If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,
the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set
this function to [Disable].
If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the Auto Lighting
Optimizer will be set automatically to [Disable].
In step 2, if you press the <B> button and uncheck <X> the [Disabled
in M or B modes] setting, the [Auto Lighting Optimizer] can also be set in
the <a> and <F> modes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise
reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high
ISO speeds. At low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the
image (shadow areas) is further reduced.
Select [High ISO speed NR].
1
Under the [z3] tab, select [High ISO
speed NR], then press <0>.
Set the level.
Select the desired noise reduction
2
level, then press <0>.
M: Multi Shot Noise Reduction
This applies noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].
For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned
and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.
If the image-recording quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you
cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction].
Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with noise
3
reduction applied.
When Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set, you can display <z> in the
viewfinder (p.409).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
183
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction
If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the
noise reduction effect may be minimal.
If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave
afterimages.
The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
If the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are
taken, irregular exposure in the image may result.
After shooting, it may take some time to record an image to the card for
noise reduction and merging the images. During the processing of the
images, “buSY” will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel,
and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.
You cannot use AEB and WB bracketing.
If [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], [z3: Multiple exposure], [z3:
HDR Mode], AEB, or WB bracketing is set, [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction] cannot be set.
You cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] for bulb exposures and
movie shooting.
Flash shooting is not possible. The EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite’s
AF-assist beam will be emitted according to the [23: AF-assist beam
firing] setting.
Doing any of the following will automatically switch the setting to
[Standard]: Set the power switch to <2>, replace the battery, replace
the card, select the <A> or <F> shooting mode, set or switch the
image-recording quality to RAW or RAW+JPEG, or switch to movie
shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec. or longer.
Select [Long exp. noise
reduction].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Long
exp. noise reduction], then press
<0>.
1
Set the desired setting.
2
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Auto
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This
[Auto] setting is effective in most cases.
Enable
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.
The [Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with
the [Auto] setting.
Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with noise
3
reduction applied.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
185
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
With [Auto] and [Enable], the noise reduction process after the picture is
taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. During
noise reduction, shooting is still possible as long as the maximum burst
indicator in the viewfinder shows “1” or higher.
Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the [Enable]
setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting.
With [Enable], if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image
displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction process.
The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is
completed. (You cannot take another picture.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186
3 Highlight Tone PriorityN
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.
Select [Highlight tone priority].
1
Under the [z3] tab, select
[Highlight tone priority], then press
<0>.
Select [Enable].
2
Highlight details are improved. The
dynamic range is expanded from the
standard 18% gray to bright
highlights. The gradation between the
grays and highlights becomes
smoother.
Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with
3
highlight tone priority applied.
When [Enable] is set, noise may increase slightly.
With [Enable], the settable range will be ISO 200 - ISO 6400. Also, the
<A> icon will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel when
highlight tone priority is enabled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
187
3
Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberration
Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners
look darker due to the lens characteristics. Color fringing along subject
outlines is called chromatic aberration. This lens aberration and light
fall-off can be corrected. By default, Peripheral illumination and
Chromatic aberration correction are set to [Enable].
If [Cannot correct - no data] is displayed, see “Lens Correction Data”
on the next page.
Peripheral Illumination Correction
Select [Lens aberration
correction].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Lens
aberration correction], then press
<0>.
1
Select the setting.
2
Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
Select [Peripheral illumin.], then
press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with the
3
peripheral illumination corrected.
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image
periphery.
The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum
correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (EOS
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188
3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberration
Chromatic Aberration Correction
Select the setting.
1
Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
Select [Chromatic aberration], then
press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with the
2
chromatic aberration corrected.
Lens Correction Data
The camera already contains data for lens peripheral illumination
correction and chromatic aberration correction for approx. 30 lenses. If
you select [Enable], the peripheral illumination correction and
chromatic aberration correction will be applied automatically for any
lens whose correction data is registered in the camera.
With EOS Utility (EOS software), you can check the lenses of which
correction data is registered in the camera. You can also register the
correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to the EOS
For lenses incorporating the correction data, it is not necessary to
register the correction data to the camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
189
3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberration
Cautions for Lens Correction
Peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction
cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken.
When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
If you use magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral
illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will not be
reflected in the image shown on the screen.
The correction amount will be less if the lens used does not have
distance information.
Notes for Lens Correction
If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image after
shooting and check it again.
Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life-size
Converter is attached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190
3 Reducing FlickerN
If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source
such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker
and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous
shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors
across the images may result.
With anti-flicker shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light
source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker causes less
effect on exposure or color.
Select [Anti-flicker shoot.].
1
Under the [z4] tab, select [Anti-
flicker shoot.], then press <0>.
Select [Enable].
2
3
Take the picture.
The image will be taken with reduced
unevenness of exposure or color
caused by the flicker.
When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the
shutter-release time lag may become longer. Also, the continuous
shooting speed may become slightly slower, and the shooting interval
may become irregular.
This function does not work with Live View shooting and movie shooting.
In the <d> or <f> mode, if the shutter speed changes during
continuous shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at
different shutter speeds, the color tone may be inconsistent. To avoid
inconsistent color tones, use the <s> or <a> mode at a fixed shutter
speed.
The color tone of images shot when [Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to
[Enable] may look different from when [Disable] is set.
Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected.
Also, if the light’s flicker frequency changes during continuous shooting,
effects of the flicker cannot be reduced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
191
3 Reducing FlickerN
If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in
the image, flicker may not be detected.
Under certain special types of lighting, the camera may not be able to
reduce the effects of the flicker even when <G> is displayed.
Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.
If you recompose a shot, <G> may appear and disappear
intermittently.
Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, expected result
may not be obtained even if you use this function.
Taking test shots is recommended.
If <G> is not displayed in the viewfinder, checkmark [Flicker
reduces the effects of the flicker when you shoot, <G> will light.
Under a light source which does not flicker, or if no flicker is detected,
<G> will not be displayed.
If [Flicker detection] is checkmarked and [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] is
set to [Disable], metering under a flickering light source will cause
<G> to blink in the viewfinder as a warning. Setting [Enable]
before shooting is recommended.
In the <A> mode, the effects of flickering light will be reduced when you
shoot, but <G> will not be displayed.
Anti-flicker shooting also works with flash. However, the expected result
may not be obtained during wireless flash shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192
3 Setting the Color SpaceN
The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this
camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.
The color space is set automatically to [sRGB] in the <A> mode.
Select [Color space].
1
Under the [z2] tab, select [Color
space], then press <0>.
Set the desired color space.
2
Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then
press <0>.
Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other
industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you are not familiar
with image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a
sRGB computer environment and with printers not compatible with
Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Post-
processing of the image with computer software will therefore be
required.
If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the
first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.
The ICC profile is not appended. For explanations about the ICC profile,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
193
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images
are to be saved.
This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for
saving captured images.
Creating a Folder
Select [Record func+card/folder
sel.].
Under the [51] tab, select [Record
func+card/folder sel.], then press
<0>.
1
Select [Folder].
2
Select [Create folder].
3
Select [OK].
X A new folder with the folder number
4
increased by one is created.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
Selecting a Folder
Select a folder on the folder selection
screen, then press <0>.
Lowest file number
Number of images in folder
X The folder where the captured
images will be saved is selected.
Subsequently captured images will
be recorded into the selected folder.
Folder name
Highest file number
Folders
As with “100EOS5D” for example, the folder name starts with three digits
(the folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can
contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is
folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can
be created.
Creating Folders with a Computer
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format
“100ABC_D”. The first three digits are the folder number, from 100 to 999.
The last five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case
letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be
used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit
folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”), even if the
remaining five characters in each name are different.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
195
3 Changing the File Name
The file name has four alphanumeric
characters followed by a four-digit image
(Example) BE3B0001.JPG
four alphanumeric characters are set upon factory shipment and unique
to the camera. However, you can change them.
With “User setting1”, you can change and register the four characters
as desired. With “User setting2”, if you register three characters, the
fourth character from the left will be appended automatically to indicate
the image size.
Registering or Changing the File Name
Select [File name].
1
Under the [51] tab, select [File
name], then press <0>.
Select [Change User setting*].
2
Enter any alphanumeric
3 characters.
For User setting1, enter four
characters. For User setting2, enter
three characters.
Press the <L> button to delete any
unnecessary characters.
Press the <Q> button. The text
palette will be highlighted with a color
frame, and text can be entered.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196
3 Changing the File Name
Operate the <5> dial or <9> to
move the and select the desired
character. Then press <0> to enter
it.
Exit the setting.
4
5
After entering the correct number of
characters, press the <M> button,
then select [OK].
X The registered file name will be
saved.
Select the registered file name.
Select [File name], then press <0>.
Select the registered file name, then
press <0>.
If User setting2 is registered, select
“*** (the 3 characters registered) +
image size”.
Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
197
3 Changing the File Name
The first character cannot be an underscore “_”.
User setting2
When you select the “*** + image size” registered with User setting2 and
take pictures, the image-recording quality character will be automatically
appended as the file name’s fourth character from the left. The meaning of
the image-recording quality characters is as follows:
“***L” = 73 / 83 / 1
“***N” = 75 / 85
“***T” = b
“***M” = 7K / 8K / 41
“***S” = 7a / 8a / 61
“***U” = c
When the image is transferred to a computer, the automatically appended
fourth character will be included. You can then see the image size without
having to open the image. RAW or JPEG images can be distinguished with
the extension.
The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.CR2” for RAW images,
and “.MOV” for movies.
When you shoot a movie with User setting2, the file name’s fourth
character will be an underscore “_”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198
3 File Numbering Methods
The four-digit file number is like the frame
number on a roll of film. The captured
(Example) BE3B0001.JPG
images are assigned a sequential file
number from 0001 to 9999 and saved in one folder. You can change
how the file number is assigned.
Select [File numbering].
1
Under the [51] tab, select [File
numbering], then press <0>.
Select the file numbering method.
2
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Continuous
Continues the file numbering sequence even after the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
Even after you replace the card, create a folder, or switch the target
card (such as f9g), the file numbering continues in sequence up to
9999 for the images saved. This is convenient when you want to save
images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or
in multiple folders into one folder on your computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue
from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the
folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is recommended
that you use a newly-formatted card each time.
File numbering after
File numbering after
replacing the card
creating a folder
Card A
Card A (f)
Card B (g)
100
0051
101
0052
0051
0052
Next sequential file number
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
199
3 File Numbering Methods
Auto Reset
Restarts the file numbering from 0001 each time the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card, create a folder, or switch the target card
(such as f9g), the file numbering continues in sequence from 0001
for the images saved. This is convenient if you want to organize images
according to cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue
from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the
folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from
0001, use a newly formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card A
Card A (f)
Card B (g)
100
0051
101
0001
0051
0001
File numbering is reset
Manual Reset
Resets the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file number 0001
in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder
starts from 0001.
This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images
taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example. After the
manual reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset.
(There will be no manual reset confirmation dialog.)
If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible
even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a
message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image
as Exif information.
Select [Copyright information].
1
Under the [54] tab, select [Copyright
information], then press <0>.
Select the option to be set.
2
Select [Enter author’s name] or
[Enter copyright details], then press
<0>.
Enter text.
Press the <Q> button. The text
3
palette will be highlighted with a color
frame, and text can be entered.
Operate the <5> dial or <9> to
move the and select the desired
character. Then press <0> to enter
it.
You can enter up to 63 characters.
To delete a character, press the <L>
button.
To cancel the text entry, press the
<B> button, then select [OK].
Exit the setting.
4
After entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
X The information is saved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
201
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
Checking the Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright
info.] in step 2, you can check the
[Author] and [Copyright] information
that you entered.
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2 on the
preceding page, you can delete the [Author] and [Copyright]
information.
If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed
entirely when you select [Display copyright info.].
You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS
software, p.520).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202
5
Advanced Operations
In the <d> <s> <f> <a>
<F> shooting modes, you can
select the shutter speed,
aperture, and other camera
settings to change the
exposure and obtain the
desired result.
A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in the following modes: <d>
<s> <f> <a> <F>.
After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the
exposure values will remain displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD panel for 4 sec. (0).
For the functions settable in each shooting mode, see page
Set the <R> switch to the left.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
203
d: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.
* <d> stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
Set the Mode Dial to <d>.
1
Focus on the subject.
2
Look through the viewfinder and aim
the AF point over the subject. Then
press the shutter button halfway.
X When focus is achieved, the focus
indicator <o> in the viewfinder will
light up (in One-Shot AF mode).
X The shutter speed and aperture will
be set automatically and displayed in
the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
Check the display.
A standard exposure will be obtained
3
as long as the shutter speed and
aperture displays do not blink.
Take the picture.
4
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204
d: Program AE
If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number
blink, it indicates underexposure.
Increase the ISO speed or use flash.
If the “8000” shutter speed and the highest f/number
blink, it indicates overexposure.
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold
separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the
lens.
Differences Between <d> and <A> Modes
In the <A> mode, many functions, such as the AF operation and metering
mode, are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can
set are limited. With <d> mode, only the shutter speed and aperture are set
automatically. You can freely set the AF operation, metering mode, and
other functions (p.456).
Program Shift
In the Program AE mode, you can freely change the shutter speed and
aperture combination (Program) set automatically by the camera while
maintaining the same exposure. This is called Program shift.
To shift the program, press the shutter button halfway, then turn the
<6> dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed.
Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer
(0) ends (exposure setting display turns off).
Program shift cannot be used with flash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
205
s: Shutter-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically
sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the
brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster
shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower
shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of
motion.
* <s> stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
Frozen action
(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)
(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
1
Set the desired shutter speed.
While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
2
Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
X The aperture is set automatically.
3
Check the viewfinder display and
4 shoot.
As long as the aperture is not
blinking, a standard exposure will be
obtained.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206
s: Shutter-Priority AE
If the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed.
If the highest f/number blinks, it indicates
overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed.
Shutter Speed Display
The shutter speeds from “8000” to “4” indicate the denominator of the
fractional shutter speed. For example, “125” indicates 1/125 sec., “0"5”
indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"” is 15 sec.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
207
f: Aperture-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the
shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure suiting the
subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher
f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower
f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus.
* <f> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).
Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
1
Set the desired aperture.
While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
2
Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
3
X
The shutter speed is set automatically.
Check the viewfinder display and
4 shoot.
As long as the shutter speed is not
blinking, a standard exposure will be
obtained.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208
f: Aperture-Priority AE
If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture
(lower f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops
or set a higher ISO speed.
If the “8000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a smaller aperture (higher
f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a
lower ISO speed.
Aperture Display
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The
f/number displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to
the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.
Depth-of-Field PreviewN
The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when
the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.
Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the
LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.
Press the depth-of-field preview button
to stop down the lens to the current
aperture setting and check the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
A higher f/number will make more of the foreground and background fall
within acceptable focus. However, the viewfinder will look darker.
aperture and press the depth-of-field preview button to see how the
depth of field changes.
The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while the depth-of-field preview
button is pressed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
209
a: Manual Exposure
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To
determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the
viewfinder or use a commercially-available exposure meter. This
method is called manual exposure.
* <a> stands for Manual.
Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
1
2
3
Set the shutter speed and aperture.
To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial.
Shutter speed
Aperture
To set the aperture, turn the <5> dial.
If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch to the left, then turn the <6>
or <5> dial.
Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
Standard exposure index
Exposure level mark
4
X
The exposure setting will be displayed
in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
The exposure level mark <h>
indicates how far the current
exposure level is from the standard
exposure level.
Set the exposure and take the
5 picture.
Check the exposure level indicator
and set the desired shutter speed and
aperture.
If the exposure level exceeds ±3
stops from the standard exposure,
the end of the exposure level
indicator will display <I> or <J>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210
a: Manual Exposure
Exposure Compensation with Auto ISO
If the ISO speed is set to A (AUTO), you can set exposure
compensation (p.214) as follows:
• [z2: Expo.comp./AEB]
• Under [83: Custom Controls], use [s: Expo comp (hold btn,
turn
• Quick Control (p.61)
If Auto ISO is set, the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter
speed and aperture in order to obtain a standard exposure. Therefore,
you may not obtain the desired exposure effect. In such a case, set the
exposure compensation.
If flash is used when Auto ISO is set, exposure compensation will not be
applied even if an exposure compensation amount is set.
Under [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark <X> for
[Disabled in M or B modes] is removed, Auto Lighting Optimizer can be
When Auto ISO is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed.
If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to
when you pressed the <A> button.
mode, and then the shooting mode is switched to <a> with Auto ISO
set, the exposure compensation amount already set will be maintained.
With Auto ISO set and [81: ISO speed setting increments] set to [1/2-
stop], any 1/2-stop exposure compensation will be implemented with the
ISO speed (1/3 stop) and shutter speed. However, the shutter speed
displayed will not change.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
211
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.
In the <A> mode, evaluative metering is set automatically.
Press the <n> button. (9)
1
Select the metering mode.
2
While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
q:Evaluative metering
w:Partial metering
r:Spot metering
e:Center-weighted average
metering
q Evaluative metering
This is a general-purpose metering mode suited
even for backlit subjects. The camera sets the
exposure automatically to suit the scene.
w Partial metering
Effective when the background is much brighter
than the subject due to backlighting, etc. Partial
metering covers approx. 6.1% of the viewfinder
area at the center.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
r Spot metering
This is for metering a specific spot of the subject or
scene. Spot metering covers approx. 1.3% of the
viewfinder area at the center. The spot metering
circle will be displayed in the viewfinder.
e Center-weighted average metering
The metering is weighted at the center and then
averaged for the entire scene.
With q (Evaluative metering), the exposure setting will be locked when
you press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved (in One-Shot
AF mode). In the w (Partial metering), r (Spot metering), and e
(Center-weighted average metering) modes, the exposure is set at the
moment the picture is taken. (Pressing the shutter button halfway does
not lock the exposure.)
When <r> (Spot metering) is set, you can display <z> in the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
213
O Setting Exposure CompensationN
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken
(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation can be set in the <d>, <s>, and <f> shooting
modes. Although you can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3-
stop increments, the exposure compensation indicator in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel can only display the setting up to ±3 stops. If you want to set the
follow the instructions for [z2: Expo.comp./AEB] on the next page.
the exposure compensation.
Check the exposure.
1
Press the shutter button halfway (
0)
and check the exposure level indicator.
Increased exposure for a brighter image
Decreased exposure for a darker image
Set the exposure compensation amount.
While looking at the viewfinder or
LCD panel, turn the <5> dial.
2
If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch to the left, then turn the <5> dial.
Take the picture.
3
To cancel exposure compensation,
set the exposure level indicator <h/N>
to the standard exposure index (<a>
or <C>).
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you
set the power switch to <2>.
After setting the exposure compensation amount, you can prevent the
exposure compensation amount from changing accidentally by setting
the <R> switch to the right.
If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the
exposure level indicator will display <I> or <J>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N
By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically, the camera
brackets the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three
successive shots. This is called AEB.
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.
Select [Expo.comp./AEB].
1
Under the [z2] tab, select
[Expo.comp./AEB], then press
<0>.
Set the AEB range.
2
Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB
range. If you turn <5>, you can set
the exposure compensation.
Press <0> to set it.
X When you exit the menu, <h> and
the AEB range will be displayed on
the LCD panel.
AEB range
Take the picture.
Three bracketed shots will be taken
3
according to the drive mode set in this
sequence: Standard exposure,
decreased exposure, and increased
Standard exposure
exposure.
AEB will not be automatically
Decreased exposure
Increased exposure
canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step
2 to turn off the AEB range display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
215
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N
During AEB, <A> in the viewfinder and <h> on the LCD panel will
blink.
If the drive mode is set to <u> or <B>, press the shutter button three
times for each shot. When <o>, <i>, or <M> is set and you hold
down the shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be
taken continuously and the camera will automatically stop shooting.
When <Q> or <k> is set, the three bracketed shots will be taken
continuously after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.
You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.
If the AEB range exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the exposure level
indicator will display <I> or <J>.
AEB cannot be used with flash, bulb exposures, or when [Multi Shot
Noise Reduction] or [HDR Mode] is set.
AEB will be canceled automatically when you set the power switch to
<2> or when the flash is ready to fire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216
A AE LockN
Use AE lock when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure
metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same
exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then
recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is effective for
backlit subjects, etc.
Focus on the subject.
1
Press the shutter button halfway.
X
The exposure setting will be displayed.
Press the <A> button. (0)
X The <A> icon lights up in the
viewfinder to indicate that the
2
exposure setting is locked (AE lock).
Each time you press the <A> button,
the current exposure setting is locked.
Recompose and take the picture.
3
If you want to maintain the AE lock
while taking more shots, hold down
the <A> button and press the shutter
button to take another shot.
AE Lock Effects
Metering Mode
Automatic Selection
Manual Selection
AE lock is applied at the AF
point that achieved focus.
AE lock is applied at the
selected AF point.
q*
AE lock is applied at the center AF point.
wre
* When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is applied at the
center AF point.
AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
217
F: Bulb Exposures
In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the
shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter
button. This is called bulb exposure. Use bulb exposures for night
scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long
exposures.
Set the Mode Dial to <F>.
1
Set the desired aperture.
2
While looking at the LCD panel or the
viewfinder, turn the <6> or <5>
dial.
Elapsed exposure time
Take the picture.
The exposure will continue for as long
3
as you keep the shutter button
pressed completely.
X The elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the LCD panel.
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
Long exposures produce more noise than usual.
For a bulb exposure, if you use both the self-timer and mirror lockup
instead of the bulb timer, keep pressing the shutter button completely
(self-timer delay time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter
button during the self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release
sound, but no picture will be taken. If you use the bulb timer under the
same shooting conditions, you need not hold down the shutter button
completely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218
F: Bulb Exposures
With [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise
generated during long exposures (p.185).
For bulb exposures, using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended.
You can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-80N3 or
Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (both sold separately, p.237).
bulb exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button,
the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button
again to stop the bulb exposure.
J Bulb TimerN
You can preset the bulb exposure’s exposure time. With the bulb timer,
you need not hold down the shutter button during the bulb exposure.
This reduces camera shake.
The bulb timer can be set only in the <F> (Bulb) shooting mode. It
cannot be set (or will not function) in any other shooting mode.
Select [Bulb timer].
1
Under the [z4] tab, select [Bulb
timer], then press <0>.
Select [Enable].
Select [Enable], then press <B>
2
button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
219
F: Bulb Exposures
Set the desired exposure time.
3
4
5
Select the hour, minute, or second.
Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Set the desired number, then press
<0> (Returns to <s>).
Select [OK].
X The set time will be displayed on the
menu screen.
X When you exit the menu, <J> will
be displayed on the LCD panel.
Take the picture.
Elapsed exposure time
X Press the shutter button completely,
and the bulb exposure will start and
continue until the set time elapses.
To cancel the timer setting, set
[Disable] in step 2.
Bulb timer
If you press the shutter button completely while the bulb timer is
operating, the bulb exposure will stop.
Doing any of the following will cancel the bulb timer (reverts to
[Disable]): Set the power switch to <2>, replace the battery, replace
the card, switch to movie shooting, or change the shooting mode to other
than <F>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
Clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced for a high dynamic
range of tones even with high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is
effective for landscape and still-life shots.
With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures (standard
exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured
continuously for each shot and then merged together
automatically. The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
Press the <b> button.
1
Select the HDR mode.
2
Select [w], then press <0>.
X The HDR mode screen will appear.
Set [Adjust dyn range].
3
Select the desired dynamic range
setting, then press <0>.
Selecting [Auto] will have the
dynamic range set automatically
depending on the image’s overall
tonal range.
The higher the number, the wider the
dynamic range will be.
To exit HDR shooting, select [Disable
HDR].
Set [Effect].
Select the desired effect, then press
4
<0>.
You can also set HDR shooting with [z3: HDR Mode].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
221
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
Effects
Natural
For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and
shadow details would otherwise be lost. Clipped highlights and
shadows will be reduced.
Art standard
While the clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced more than
with [Natural], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation flatter to
have the picture look like a painting. The subject outlines will have
bright (or dark) edges.
Art vivid
The colors are more saturated than with [Art standard], and the low
contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect.
Art bold
The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and
the picture look like an oil painting.
Art embossed
The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are
decreased to make the picture look flat. The picture looks faded and
old. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.
Art standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Flat
Art vivid
High
Art bold
Higher
Strong
Standard
Flat
Art embossed
Low
Saturation
Bold outline
Brightness
Tone
Weak
Stronger
Dark
Standard
Flat
Flatter
Each effect will be applied based on the characteristics of the Picture Style
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
Set [Continuous HDR].
Select either [1 shot only] or [Every
shot], then press <0>.
5
With [1 shot only], HDR shooting will
be canceled automatically after the
shooting ends.
With [Every shot], HDR shooting
continues until the setting in step 3 is
set to [Disable HDR].
Set [Auto Image Align].
6
7
For handheld shooting, select
[Enable]. When using a tripod, select
[Disable], then press <0>.
Set the images to be saved.
To save all three images and the
merged HDR image, select [All
images], then press <0>.
To save only the HDR image, select
[HDR img only], then press <0>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
223
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
Take the picture.
8
HDR shooting is possible with
viewfinder shooting and Live View
shooting.
X <w> will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
When you press the shutter button
completely, three consecutive images
will be captured, and the HDR image
will be recorded to the card.
If the image-recording quality is set to RAW, the HDR image will be
recorded in 73 quality. If the image-recording quality is set to
RAW+JPEG, the HDR image will be recorded in the JPEG quality set.
HDR shooting is not possible with ISO expansion (L, H). HDR shooting is
possible within ISO 100 - ISO 6400.
The flash will not fire during HDR shooting.
During HDR shooting, the settings of [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer],
[z3: Highlight tone priority], and [z5: Expo. simulation] will be
automatically switched to [Disable].
AEB cannot be set.
If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave
afterimages.
In HDR shooting, 3 images are captured with different shutter speeds set
automatically. Therefore, even in <s> and <a> shooting modes, the
shutter speed will be shifted based on the shutter speed you set.
To prevent camera shake, a high ISO speed may be set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
When shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable],
not be appended to the image.
If you perform handheld HDR shooting while [Auto Image Align] is set
to [Enable], image periphery will be slightly cropped and resolution will
be slightly lowered (except when shooting with [1.3x (crop)] or [1.6x
(crop)]). Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to camera
shake, etc., auto image alignment may not take effect. Note that when
shooting with excessively bright (or dark) exposure settings, auto image
alignment may not work properly.
If you perform handheld HDR shooting while [Auto Image Align] is set
to [Disable], the 3 images may not be properly aligned and the HDR
effect may be minimal. Using a tripod is recommended.
Auto image alignment may not work properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced
correctly. Irregular colors, irregular exposure or noise may appear.
HDR shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural
color reproduction of the illuminated areas.
With HDR shooting, the images will be merged, then saved to the card,
so it may take some time. Therefore, it will take a longer time to record
the HDR image to the card than with normal shooting. During the
processing of the images, “buSY” will be displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD panel, and you cannot take another picture until the
processing is completed.
If you change the shooting mode or switch to movie shooting after setting
HDR shooting, HDR shooting setting may be cleared ([Adjust dyn
range] setting may be switched to [Disable HDR]).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
225
P Multiple ExposuresN
You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image. If
you shoot multiple-exposure images with Live View shooting (p.255),
you can see how the single exposures are being merged while
shooting.
Press the <b> button.
1
Select Multiple exposure.
2
Select [P], then press <0>.
X The multiple exposure setting screen
will appear.
Set [Multiple exposure].
3
Select [On:Func/Ctrl] or
[On:ContShtng], then press <0>.
To exit shooting multiple exposures,
select [Disable].
On: Func/Ctrl (Function and control priority)
Convenient when you want to shoot multiple exposures while
checking the result as you proceed. During continuous shooting, the
continuous shooting speed will decrease greatly.
On: ContShtng (Continuous shooting priority)
Geared for continuous multiple-exposure shooting of a moving
subject. Continuous shooting is possible, but the following
operations are disabled during shooting: menu viewing, Live View
display, image review after image capture, image playback, and
undo last image (p.232).
Also, only the multiple-exposure image will be saved. (The single
exposures merged in the multiple-exposure image will not be
saved.)
You can also set multiple exposure with [z3: Multiple exposure].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226
P Multiple ExposuresN
Set [Multi-expos ctrl].
Select the desired multiple-exposure
control method, then press <0>.
4
Additive
The exposure of each single exposure is added cumulatively. Based
on the [No. of exposures], set a negative exposure compensation.
Refer to the basic guide below to set a negative exposure
compensation.
Exposure Compensation Setting Guide for Multiple Exposures
Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures:
-2 stops
Average
Based on the [No. of exposures], negative exposure compensation
is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot
multiple exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s
background will be automatically controlled to obtain a standard
exposure.
Bright/Dark
The brightness (or darkness) of the base image and the images to
be added are compared at the same position, and then the bright (or
dark) part will be left in the picture. Depending on the overlapping
colors, the colors may be mixed depending on the brightness (or
darkness) ratio of the compared images.
Set the [No. of exposures].
5
Select the number of exposures, then
press <0>.
You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
227
P Multiple ExposuresN
Set the images to be saved.
6
7
To save all the single exposures and
the merged multiple-exposure image,
select [All images], then press <0>.
To save only the merged multiple-
exposure image, select [Result
only], then press <0>.
Set [Continue Mult-exp].
Select either [1 shot only] or
[Continuously], then press <0>.
With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure
shooting will be canceled
automatically after the shooting ends.
With [Continuously], multiple-
exposure shooting continues until the
setting in step 3 is set to [Disable].
Take the first exposure.
8
X When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, the
captured image will be displayed.
X The <P> icon will blink.
The number of remaining exposures
is displayed in brackets [ ] in the
viewfinder or on the screen.
Pressing the <x> button enables
you to view the captured image
Remaining number of exposures
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228
P Multiple ExposuresN
Shoot subsequent exposures.
9
X When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, the
merged multiple-exposure image will
be displayed.
With Live View shooting, the multiple-
exposure images merged so far will
be displayed. By pressing the
<B> button, you can display only
the Live View image.
After you shoot the set number of
exposures, multiple-exposure shooting
will exit. With continuous shooting, after
you finish shooting the set number of
exposures while holding down the
shutter button, the shooting will stop.
The image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed
noise reduction and color space, etc. set for the first single exposure will
also be set for the subsequent exposures.
You cannot use crop shooting or shoot with a set aspect ratio for multiple
exposures. [Full-frame] will be applied for [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] for
shooting.
During multiple exposure shooting, the settings of [z1: Lens
aberration correction], [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], and [z3:
Highlight tone priority] will be automatically switched to [Disable].
If [z3: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for
shooting.
If [On:Func/Ctrl] and [Additive], [Bright], or [Dark] are both set, the
image displayed during shooting may look noisy. However, when you
finish shooting the set number of exposures, noise reduction will be
applied and the final multiple-exposure image will be less noisy.
If you perform Live View shooting while [On:ContShtng] is set, the Live
View function will stop automatically after the first shot is taken. From the
second shot onward, shoot while looking through the viewfinder.
When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, you can press the <x> button to view the
multiple exposures taken so far or delete the last single exposure (p.232).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
229
P Multiple ExposuresN
With multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more
noticeable the noise, irregular colors, and banding will be. Also, as noise
increases with higher ISO speeds, shooting at low ISO speeds is
recommended.
If [Additive], [Bright], or [Dark] is set, the image processing after taking
the multiple exposures will take time. (The access lamp will light up
longer.)
If you perform Live View shooting while [On:Func/Ctrl] and [Additive],
[Bright], or [Dark] are both set, the Live View function will stop
automatically when the multiple-exposure shooting ends.
In step 9, the brightness and noise of the multiple-exposure image
displayed during Live View shooting will be different from the final
multiple-exposure image recorded.
If [On:ContShtng] is set, let go of the shutter button after shooting the
set number of exposures.
Doing any of the following will cancel the multiple-exposure shooting: Set
the power switch to <2>, replace the battery, replace the card, or
switch to movie shooting.
If you switch the shooting mode to <A> or <w/x/y> while shooting,
multiple-exposure shooting will end.
If you connect the camera to a computer or printer, multiple-exposure
shooting will not be possible. If you connect the camera to a computer or
printer during shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230
P Multiple ExposuresN
Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the Card
You can select a 1 image recorded on the card as the first single
exposure. The image data of the selected 1 image will remain intact.
You can only select 1 images. You cannot select 41/61 or
JPEG images.
Select [Select image for multi. expo.].
X The images on the card will be
1
displayed.
Select an image.
2
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be used as the first single
exposure, then press <0>.
Select [OK].
X The file number of the selected image
will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
Take the picture.
3
When you select the first image, the
number of remaining exposures as set
with [No. of exposures] will decrease
by 1. For example, if [No. of
exposures] is 3, you can shoot two
exposures
.
The following cannot be selected as the first single exposure: Images
shot with [z3: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable], images whose
[z4: Crop/aspect ratio] is set to any setting other than [Full-frame]
[Disable] will be applied for [z1: Lens aberration correction] and
[z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] regardless of the settings of the 1
image selected as the first single exposure.
The ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, and color space,
etc. set for the first image will also be applied for the subsequent images.
1
If [z3: Picture Style] is Auto for the RAW image selected as the first
1 image, Standard will be applied for shooting.
You cannot select an image taken with another camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
231
P Multiple ExposuresN
You can also select a 1 multiple-exposure image as the first single
exposure.
If you select [Deselect img], the selected image will be canceled.
Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting
When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set and you
have not finished shooting the set
number of exposures, you can press the
<x> button to view the merged
multiple-exposure image so far. You can
check how it looks and the exposure.
(Not possible when [On:ContShtng] is
set.)
If you press the <L> button, the
operations possible during multiple-
exposure shooting will be displayed.
Operation
Description
Deletes the last image you shot (shoot another
image). The number of remaining exposures
will increase by 1.
q Undo last image
If [Save source imgs: All images] is set, all of
the single exposures and the merged multiple-
exposure image will be saved before exiting.
If [Save source imgs: Result only] is set, only
the multiple-exposure image merged so far will
be saved before exiting.
W Save and exit
None of the images will be saved before
exiting.
r Exit without saving
The screen before you pressed the <L> button
will reappear.
2 Return to previous screen
During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multiple-
exposure images.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232
P Multiple ExposuresN
FAQ
Are there any restrictions on the image-recording quality?
All JPEG image-recording quality settings can be selected. If 41
or 61 is set, the merged multiple-exposure will be a 1 image.
Image-Recording
Quality Setting
Merged Multiple-
Exposure
Single Exposures
JPEG
JPEG
JPEG
1
1
1
41/61
1+JPEG
41/61+JPEG
41/61
1+JPEG
41/61+JPEG
1
1+JPEG
1+JPEG
Can I merge images recorded on the card?
With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the first single
you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.
Are multiple exposures possible with Live View shooting?
With [On:Func/Ctrl] set, you can shoot multiple exposures with Live
[z4: Crop/aspect ratio] for shooting.
What file numbers are used for saving merged multiple-exposures?
If all images are set to be saved, the merged multiple-exposure
image file number will be the serial number coming after the file
number of the final single exposure used to create the merged
multiple-exposure image.
Will auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure shooting?
As long as [52: Auto power off] is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the power will turn off automatically after 30 min. of non-
operation. If the auto power off takes effect, multiple-exposure
shooting will end, and multiple-exposure settings will be canceled.
Before starting the multiple-exposure shooting, the auto power off
will take effect as set with the camera, and multiple-exposure
settings will be canceled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
233
2 Mirror LockupN
Camera vibrations caused by the mirror’s reflex action when the picture
is taken is called “mirror shock”. Mirror lockup keeps the mirror up
before and while shooting to reduce blur caused by camera vibrations.
Useful when shooting closeups (macro photography), using a super
telephoto lens, and shooting at slow shutter speeds.
Select [Mirror lockup].
1
Under the [z4] tab, select [Mirror
lockup], then press <0>.
Select the desired setting.
2
X When you exit the menu, <2> will
be displayed on the LCD panel.
Take the picture.
If you select [Press V twice to
3
shoot], press the shutter button
completely to lock up the mirror, then
press it completely again to take a
picture.
If you select [Shoot * sec. after
press], press the shutter button
completely to lock up the mirror. A
picture will be taken after the set time
elapses. You can select 1/8 sec. after,
1/4 sec. after, 1/2 sec. after, 1 sec.
after, or 2 sec. after.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234
2 Mirror LockupN
Minimizing Blurred Photos
Use a sturdy tripod suited for the camera weight. Mount the camera
securely on the tripod.
Using a remote switch or a remote controller is recommended
When using mirror lockup, setting [Shoot * sec. after press] is
recommended. Selecting a longer time, such as [Shoot 2 sec. after
press], will increase time before the shot, reducing mirror shock.
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day,
take the picture promptly after mirror lockup is stabilized.
When [Press V twice to shoot] is set, single shooting will take effect
even if the drive mode is set to continuous shooting.
If [z4: Interval timer] or [z4: Bulb timer] is set to [Enable], you
cannot select [Press V twice to shoot].
If you use [Shoot *sec. after press] for Multi Shot Noise Reduction
shooting or HDR shooting, the [Shoot *sec. after press] setting will be
applied only to the first shot. (Continuous shooting will apply for the
second and subsequent shots.)
During mirror lockup, shooting function settings and menu are disabled.
When [Shoot * sec. after press] is set, you can also use the self-timer or
bulb timer with mirror lockup.
If 30 sec. elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back down
automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely locks up the mirror
again.
For mirror lockup, using a tripod and Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold
separately) or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold separately) is
recommended (p.237).
lockup. Setting the remote controller to a 2-sec. delay is recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
235
Using the Eyepiece Cover
When you use the self-timer, bulb, or a remote switch and do not look
through the viewfinder, stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the
attached to the camera strap.
During Live View shooting and movie shooting, it is not necessary to
attach the eyepiece cover.
Detach the eyecup.
1
While grasping both sides of the
eyecup, slide it upward to detach it.
Attach the eyepiece cover.
2
Slide the eyepiece cover down into
the eyepiece groove to attach it.
After you finish shooting, detach the
eyepiece cover and attach the
eyecup.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236
F Using a Remote Switch
You can connect the Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold separately) or
Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold separately) or any EOS
accessory equipped with an N3-type terminal to the camera for
shooting (p.454).
To operate the accessory, refer to its instruction manual.
Open the terminal cover.
1
Connect the plug to the remote
2 control terminal.
Connect the plug as shown in the
illustration.
To disconnect the plug, grasp the
silver part and pull.
R Remote Control Shooting
With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately), you
can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet
from the camera. You can either shoot immediately or
use a 2-sec. delay.
You can also use Remote Controller RC-1 and RC-5.
Focus on the subject.
1
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
2 to <MF>.
You can also shoot with <f>.
Press the <o> button. (9)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
237
R Remote Control Shooting
Select the self-timer.
4
While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <5> dial to
select <Q> or <k>.
Press the remote controller’s
5 transmit button.
Point the remote controller toward the
camera’s remote control sensor, and
press the transmit button.
X The self-timer lamp lights up and the
picture is taken.
Remote
control
sensor
Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by
triggering the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the camera away from
such light sources.
If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera and
operate it, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter
inadvertently.
If flash light is emitted from a flash on another camera around this
camera, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter
inadvertently. Do not expose the remote control sensor to flash light from
a flash on another camera.
Remote control shooting is also possible with devices such as an EX-series
Speedlite equipped with a remote-release function (sold separately).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238
H Interval Timer Shooting
With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and the number
of shots. The camera will repeat taking one shot with the set interval
until the set number of shots are taken.
Select [Interval timer].
Under the [z4] tab (the [z2] tab in
1
<A>), select [Interval timer], then
press <0>.
Select [Enable].
Select [Enable], then press <B>
2
button.
Set the interval and number of
3 shots.
Select the hour, minute, second, or
number of shots.
Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Set the desired number, then press
<0> (Returns to <s>).
Interval
Settable from [00:00:01] to [99:59:59].
No. of shots
Settable from [01] to [99]. If you set [00], the camera will keep
shooting until you stop the interval timer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
239
H Interval Timer Shooting
Select [OK].
X The interval timer settings will be
displayed on the menu screen.
X When you exit the menu, <H>
will be displayed on the LCD panel.
No. of shots
Interval
4
5
Interval timer
Take the picture.
X Shooting will start according to the
interval timer settings.
During interval timer shooting,
<H> will blink.
After the set number of shots are
taken, the interval timer shooting will
stop and be automatically canceled.
Using a tripod is recommended.
Taking test shots is recommended.
After the interval timer shooting starts, you can still press the shutter
button completely to take a picture as usual. However, from 5 sec. before
the next interval timer shooting, the shooting function settings, menu
operation, image playback, and other operations will be suspended, and
the camera will be ready to shoot.
If a picture is taken or an image is being processed as the next interval
timer shooting, that interval timer shooting will be canceled. This will
make the number of interval timer images captured lower than the set
number of shots.
Auto power off operates with the interval timer. The power will
automatically turn on approx. 1 min. before the next shot.
Interval timer shooting can be combined with AEB, WB bracketing,
multiple exposures, and HDR mode.
You can stop the interval timer shooting by selecting [Disable] or turning
the power switch to <2>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240
H Interval Timer Shooting
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
If the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>, the camera will not shoot
when focus is not achieved. Setting it to <MF> and focusing manually is
recommended.
Live View shooting, movie shooting, or bulb exposures cannot be
performed with interval timer.
For prolonged interval timer shooting, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6
(sold separately) to power the camera is recommended.
If a long exposure or shutter speed longer than the shooting interval is
set, the camera cannot shoot at the set interval. The camera will thereby
shoot fewer shots than the number set for interval timer shooting. Also,
the number of shots may decrease when the shutter speed and the
shooting interval are nearly the same.
If card recording time is longer than the set shooting interval, due to card
performance or shooting settings, etc., the camera may not shoot at the
set shooting interval.
If you use flash with interval timer shooting, set an interval longer than
the flash’s recycling time. Otherwise, if the interval is too short, the flash
may not fire.
If the shooting interval is too short, the camera may not take a picture or
may capture an image without autofocusing.
Interval timer shooting will be canceled and reset to [Disable] if you do
any of the following: Set the power switch to <2>, display the Live
View or movie shooting screen, set the shooting mode to <F> or a
After interval timer shooting starts, you cannot use remote control
external Speedlite.
During interval timer shooting, if your eye will not remain on the
entering the viewfinder can throw off the exposure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
241
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242
6
Flash Photography
This chapter explains how to shoot with external EX-
series Speedlites (sold separately) and how to set
Speedlite settings with the camera’s menu screen.
Flash cannot be used with movie shooting. It will not fire.
AEB cannot be used with flash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
243
D Flash Photography
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites
An EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash photography as
easy as normal shooting.
For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s
instruction manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all
the features of EX-series Speedlites.
To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions with the camera’s
Shoe-mount Speedlites
Macro Lites
Flash exposure compensation
In the same way as normal exposure compensation, flash exposure
compensation can be set. You can set flash exposure compensation
up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
Press the camera’s <m> button, then turn the <5> dial while
looking in the viewfinder or at the LCD panel.
FE lock
This enables you to attain a proper flash exposure for a specific part
of the subject. Aim the viewfinder center over the subject, press the
camera’s <B> button, then compose the shot and take the
picture.
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
If it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus, the EOS-dedicated, external
Speedlite will automatically emit the AF-assist beam as necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244
D Flash Photography
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series
With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or
<f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before
shooting.
When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the
manual flash mode.
Non-Canon Flash Units
Sync Speed
The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at
1/200 sec. and slower speeds. With large studio flash units, be sure to
test the flash synchronization before shooting with the sync speed set
within approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec. The flash duration of such units is
longer than that of compact flash units and varies depending on the
model.
PC Terminal
The camera’s PC terminal can be
used with flash units having a sync
cord. The PC terminal is threaded to
prevent inadvertent disconnection.
The camera’s PC terminal has no
polarity. You can connect any sync
cord regardless of its polarity.
Cautions for Live View Shooting
If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z6:
[Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
245
D Flash Photography
If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to
another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and
malfunction may result.
Do not connect to the camera’s PC terminal any flash unit with an output
voltage of 250 V or more.
Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It may
not fire.
A flash unit attached to the camera’s hot shoe and a flash unit connected to
the PC terminal can both be used at the same time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246
3 Setting the FlashN
With an EX-series Speedlite having compatible flash function settings,
you can use the camera’s menu screen to set the Speedlite’s functions
and Custom Functions. Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn
on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions.
For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
Select [External Speedlite
control].
Under the [z1] tab, select [External
Speedlite control], then press <0>.
X The external Speedlite control screen
will appear.
1
Select the desired item.
2
Select the menu option to be set, then
press <0>.
Flash Firing
To enable flash photography, set
[Enable]. To enable only the AF-assist
beam to be emitted, set [Disable].
E-TTL II Metering
For normal flash exposures, set it to
[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the flash
exposure will be averaged for the entire
metered scene. Depending on the scene,
flash exposure compensation may be
necessary. This setting is for advanced
users.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
247
3 Setting the FlashN
Flash Sync. Speed in Av Mode
You can set the flash-sync speed for
flash photography in the aperture-priority
AE (f) mode.
: Auto
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200
sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync is
also possible.
: 1/200-1/60sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.
It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,
the background may come out dark.
: 1/200 sec. (fixed)
The flash-sync speed is fixed at 1/200 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/200-1/60sec.
auto]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out
darker than with [1/200-1/60sec. auto].
If [1/200-1/60sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] is set, high-speed sync is not
possible in the <f> mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248
3 Setting the FlashN
Flash Function Settings
The screen display and setting options will vary depending on the
Speedlite model, current flash mode, Speedlite’s Custom Function
settings, etc.
To see which functions your Speedlite (sold separately) provides, refer
to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Sample display
Wireless functions/
Flash ratio control
Flash zoom
Flash mode
(Flash coverage)
Shutter
synchronization
Flash exposure
bracketing
Flash exposure
compensation
Flash mode
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.
[E-TTL II flash metering] is the standard
mode of EX-series Speedlites for
automatic flash shooting.
[Manual flash] is for setting the
Speedlite’s [Flash output level]
yourself.
Regarding other flash modes, refer to the
instruction manual of a Speedlite
compatible with the functions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
249
3 Setting the FlashN
Wireless functions / Flash ratio control
Wireless (multiple) flash shooting is
possible with radio or optical
transmission.
For details on wireless flash, refer to the
instruction manual of a Speedlite
compatible with wireless flash shooting.
With a macro flash (MR-14EX II, etc.)
compatible with flash function settings,
you can set the flash ratio between flash
tubes or flash heads A and B, or use
wireless flash with slave units.
For details on flash ratio control, refer to
the macro flash’s instruction manual.
Flash zoom (Flash coverage)
With Speedlites having a zooming flash
head, you can set the flash coverage.
Normally, set this to [AUTO] so that the
camera will automatically set the flash
coverage to match the lens focal length.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250
3 Setting the FlashN
Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [First-curtain
synchronization] so that the flash fires
immediately after the exposure starts.
If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the flash will fire right
before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter
speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night
with a more natural feel. With second-curtain synchronization, two
flashes will be fired: once when you press the shutter button completely,
and once immediately before the exposure ends.
If [High-speed synchronization] is set, the flash can be used at all
shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to shoot with
background blur (open aperture) in locations such as outdoors in
daylight.
Flash exposure compensation
You can set flash exposure
compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop
increments.
For details, refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
Flash exposure bracketing
While changing the flash output
automatically, three shots will be taken.
For details, refer to the instruction
manual of a Speedlite equipped with
flash exposure bracketing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
251
3 Setting the FlashN
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25
sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain
synchronization will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain
synchronization] is set.
With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings,
you can only set the following: [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], and
[Flash exposure compensation] under [Flash function settings].
([Shutter synchronization] can also be set with certain EX-series
Speedlites.)
If flash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite, you cannot set
the flash exposure compensation with the camera. If it is set with both
the camera and Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252
3 Setting the FlashN
Flash Custom Function Settings
For details on the Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
(sold separately) instruction manual.
Select [Flash C.Fn settings].
1
Set the desired functions.
2
Select the number, then press <0>.
Select the setting, then press <0>.
With an EX-series Speedlite, if the [Flash metering mode] Custom
Function is set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the Speedlite will always
fire at full output.
Clear Settings
Select [Clear settings].
1
Select the settings to be cleared.
2
Select [Clear flash settings] or
[Clear all Speedlite C.Fn’s], then
press <0>.
On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK]. Then the flash settings or
Custom Function settings will all be
cleared.
The Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled with the
camera’s [External Speedlite control] screen. Set it with the Speedlite.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
253
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254
7
Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
You can shoot while viewing the
picture on the camera’s LCD
monitor. This is called “Live View
shooting”.
Live View shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <A>.
If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the
LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.
Using a tripod is recommended.
Remote Live View Shooting
you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely
while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to the EOS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
255
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <A>.
1
Display the Live View image.
2
Press the <0> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
The Live View image will closely
match the brightness level of the
actual image you capture.
Focus on the subject.
3
When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely.
4
X
The picture is taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD monitor.
X When the playback display ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
Press the <0> button to exit the
Live View shooting.
The image’s field of view is approx. 100% (when the image-recording
quality is set to JPEG 73 with full-frame).
In the <d> <s> <f> <a> <F> shooting mode, you can check the
depth of field by pressing the depth-of-field preview button.
During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also
be applied to subsequent shots.
View shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Enabling Live View Shooting
Set [z5: Live View shoot.] (the [z3]
tab in <A>) to [Enable].
Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting
(Approx. number of shots)
Room Temperature
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Possible shots
220
210
The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N and
CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, total continuous Live View shooting
time will be as follows: At room temperature (23°C/73°F): Approx. 1 hr. 45 min.,
At low temperatures (0°C/32°F): Approx. 1 hr. 40 min.
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.
When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot
will be taken. Also, the time it takes to take the picture after you press the
shutter button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder
shooting.
If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn
Auto power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end
automatically after 30 min. (camera power remains on).
With the HDMI cable HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display the
output. If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, set the [53:
Video system] correctly to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the
video system of your TV set).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
257
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Information Display
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
Possible shots/Seconds
remaining on self-timer
Maximum burst
Battery level
Temperature warning
Number of remaining multiple exposures
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
HDR shooting/
Multiple exposures/
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Histogram display
Card for recording
Card
Shooting mode/
Scene icon
Image-recording
quality
AF method
Drive mode
White balance/
White balance
correction
Metering mode
Crop/aspect ratio
AE lock
Picture Style
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Exposure simulation
AEB/FEB
Flash ready/
Flash off/Hi-speed sync
Shutter speed
ISO speed
Flash exposure compensation
Highlight tone priority
GPS connection indicator
Aperture
Exposure compensation
Digital compass
Exposure level indicator
Eye-Fi card transmission status
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
The histogram can be displayed when [z5: Expo. simulation: Enable]
You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button
is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level cannot
be displayed.
When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image
brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.
If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at
a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low-
or bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect
the exposure setting. Note that the noise may be more noticeable than
the actual image recorded.
If Multi Shot Noise Reduction, bulb exposure, or flash is used, the
<g> icon and histogram will be displayed in gray (just as reference).
The histogram may not be properly displayed in low- or bright-light
conditions.
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact
burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems
or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
259
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Scene Icons
In the <A> shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and
sets everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene
type is indicated on the upper left of the screen. For certain scenes or
shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*1
Subject
Portrait
Non-portrait
Background
Color
Nature and
Outdoor
Scene
*2
Movement
Movement Close
Background
Bright
Backlit
Gray
Blue Sky
Included
Light blue
Orange
Backlit
Sunset
Spotlight
Dark
*3
*3
Dark blue
With
*4*5
*3
*4*5
*3
Tripod
*1:Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2:Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension
Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3:The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.
*4:Displayed when all the following conditions apply: The shooting scene is dark, it
is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a tripod.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
*5:Displayed with any of the lenses below:
• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
• EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses marketed in 2012 or later.
*4+*5:If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow down.
Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation shows the results of the current settings for
Picture Style, white balance and other functions in the Live View image,
so you can see what the captured image will look like.
The Live View image will automatically show the effects of the settings
listed below.
Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting
Picture Style
* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be
reflected.
White balance
White balance correction
Metering mode
Exposure (with [z5: Expo. simulation: Enable] set)
Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Highlight tone priority
Crop/aspect ratio (shooting area confirmation)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
261
Shooting Function Settings
Crop/Aspect
You can perform crop shooting, or shoot with the set aspect ratio for
them with the Quick Control screen, see the next page.
If you use [83: Custom Controls] to
assign [Switch between crop/aspect]
to the <B> button, you can just
press the <B> button while
displaying Live View image to switch the
Crop/aspect setting. For details, see
If Crop/aspect is set for Live View shooting, the image’s field of view will be
approx. 100% (when the image-recording quality is set to JPEG 73).
B/q/R/f/y/i/A Settings
When the Live View image is displayed, if you press the <n>,
<o>, <m>, or <b> button, the setting screen will appear on
the LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the
respective shooting function.
By pressing the <n> button and then the <B> button, you
can set WB shift and WB bracketing.
When you set w (Partial metering) or r (Spot metering), a metering circle
will be displayed in the center.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262
Shooting Function Settings
Q Quick Control
In the <d> <s> <f> <a> <F> modes, the AF method, Drive
mode, Metering mode, Crop/aspect ratio, Recording/playing back
card and image quality, White balance, Picture Style, and Auto
Lighting Optimizer can be set.
In the <A> mode, only the functions in bold above can be set.
Press the <Q> button (7).
1
X The settable functions will be
displayed.
Select a function and set it.
2
Use <9> to select a function.
X The setting of the selected function is
displayed on the screen.
Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it.
To set the RAW image-recording
quality, press <0>.
To select the card for recording/
playing back, WB shift/bracketing, or
Picture Style parameters, press the
<B> button.
To set Auto white balance, select
[Q], then press <0>.
Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to Live View shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
263
3 Menu Function Settings
z5
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <A>, the Live
View shooting menu options will appear
under the [z5] and [z6] tabs (the
[z3] tab in <A>).
The settable functions on this menu screen apply only to Live View
shooting. They do not work with viewfinder shooting (settings
become invalid).
Live View shooting
You can set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].
AF method
You can select [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Single]. See pages
Continuous AF
The default setting is [Disable].
When [Enable] is set, the camera attains rough focus on the subject
continuously. This makes it quicker to achieve focus when you press
the shutter button halfway. If [Enable] is set, the lens will operate
constantly and consume more battery power. This will reduce the
number of possible shots due to shorter battery life.
If you want to set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> during
Continuous AF, first stop Live View shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264
3 Menu Function Settings
Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you
compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the
subject.
Exposure simulationN
Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness of
the actual image (exposure) will look.
• Enable (g)
The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual
brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure
compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.
• During e (E/g)
Normally, the image is displayed at the standard brightness to
make the Live View image easy to see. The image will be
displayed close to the actual brightness (exposure) of the resulting
image only while you hold down the depth-of-field preview button.
• Disable (E)
The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live
View image easy to see. Even if you set exposure compensation,
the image is displayed at the standard brightness.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
265
3 Menu Function Settings
z6 N
Silent LV shootingN
• Mode 1
You can suppress the camera noise when shooting. Continuous
shooting is also possible. If <o> is set, you can shoot at a
maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 5.0 fps.
• Mode 2
When the shutter button is pressed completely, only one shot will
be taken. While you keep holding down the shutter button, the
camera operation will be suspended. Then when you return to the
shutter button’s halfway position, the camera operation will
resume. The shooting noise is thereby minimized. Even if
continuous shooting is set, only a single shot will be taken.
• Disable
Be sure to set it to [Disable] if you use a TS-E lens (other than
those listed in
below) for shifting or tilting the lens or if you
use an Extension Tube. If [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] is set, the standard
exposure may not be obtained, or an irregular exposure may
result.
If you use [Mode 1] with continuous shooting, the [Disable] setting will
be applied to the second and subsequent shots.
When shooting with flash, the [Disable] setting will be applied regardless
of the [Silent LV shoot.] setting. (Silent shooting cannot be performed.)
When using a non-Canon flash unit, set it to [Disable]. The flash will not
fire if it is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
will be the same as with [Mode 1].
With the TS-E17mm f/4L or TS-E24mm f/3.5L II lens, you can use [Mode 1]
or [Mode 2].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266
3 Menu Function Settings
Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
Performing any of the following operations will stop Live View shooting. To
start Live View shooting again, press the <0> button.
• Selecting [z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning], [54: Clear
all camera settings], or [54: zfirmware ver.].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
267
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Selecting the AF Method
If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens’s focus mode switch to
Select the AF method.
Under the [z5] tab (the [z3] tab in
<A>), select [AF method].
Select the desired AF method, then
press <0>.
When the Live View image is
displayed, you can press the
<o> button to select the AF
method.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
u(face)+Tracking: c
The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the
AF point <p> also moves to track the face.
Display the Live View image.
Press the <0> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
1
the LCD monitor.
Select an AF point.
2
When a face is detected, the <p>
frame will appear over the face to be
focused on.
If multiple faces are detected, <q>
will be displayed. Use <9> to move
the <q> frame over the face you
want to focus on.
If no faces are detected, the camera
will switch to FlexiZone - Single
Focus on the subject.
3
Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
Take the picture.
Check the focus and exposure, then
4
press the shutter button completely to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
269
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Focusing on a subject other than a human face
Press <9> or <0> and the AF frame < > will appear in the
center. Then use <9> to move the AF frame over the desired
subject. Once the AF frame < > achieves focus, it will track the
subject even if the subject moves or if you change the composition.
If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be
detected, then perform AF.
An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the
picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
The <p> may cover only part of the face.
Since AF is not possible with a face or a subject detected near the edge
of the picture, the <p> or < > will be grayed out. If you press the
shutter button halfway in this situation, the subject will be focused on with
the FlexiZone - Single method.
The size of the AF frame varies depending on the subject or the setting
of [z4: Crop/aspect ratio].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
FlexiZone - Single: d
The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you
want to focus on a particular subject.
Display the Live View image.
Press the <0> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
1
X The AF point < > will appear.
AF point
Move the AF point.
2
Use <9> to move the AF point to
where you want to focus. (It cannot
be moved to the edge of the screen.)
Pressing <9>, <0>, or <L> button
will return the AF point to the screen’s
center.
Focus on the subject.
3
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
Take the picture.
Check the focus and exposure, then
4
press the shutter button completely to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
271
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
The size of the AF point varies depending on the setting of [z4: Crop/
aspect ratio].
During movie shooting, if [Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable], the AF
point will be displayed in a larger size.
Notes for AF
AF Operation
Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway
will focus again.
The image brightness may change during and after the AF
operation.
If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,
the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,
exit Live View shooting and execute AF under the actual light
source.
If you cannot achieve focus with AF, set the lens’s focus mode switch to
If you shoot the subject at the periphery and it is slightly out of focus, aim
the center AF point over the subject you want to focus on, focus again,
and then take the picture.
The external Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam. However, if an
EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used,
the LED light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat
surfaces or when highlight or shadow details are clipped.
Subjects in low light.
Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the
horizontal direction.
Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,
computer keyboards, etc.).
Fine lines and subject outlines.
Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps
changing.
Night scenes or dots of light.
Under fluorescent or LED lighting when the image flickers.
Extremely small subjects.
Subjects at the edge of the picture.
Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with a highly
reflective body, etc.)
Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal
in a cage, etc.)
Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still
due to camera shake or subject blur.
A subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
Performing AF while the subject is very far out of focus.
Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
A special effect filter is used.
Noise (spots, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
Using AF with any of the following lenses may take longer to achieve focus,
or the correct focus may not be achieved.
EF50mm f/1.4 USM, EF50mm f/1.8 II, EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro,
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM
For information on discontinued lenses, refer to the Canon Web site.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
273
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Magnified View for FlexiZone - Single
With [FlexiZone - Single], pressing the
<u> button will magnify the image to
check the focus in the following
sequence: approx. 6x, then approx. 16x.
The image will be magnified at the AF point.
If you press the shutter button halfway, AF will be performed in the
magnified view.
If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view
and perform AF.
Magnified view is not possible with [u +Tracking].
If AF is perfomed in the normal view and then magnify the view, accurate
focus may not be achieved.
AF speed differs between normal view and magnified view.
the magnified view.
The [x6] and [x16] views are always displayed in magnification of the
view with [Full-frame] setting, regardless of the [z4: Crop/aspect
ratio] setting.
During magnified view, achieving focus becomes more difficult due to
camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
If [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] is set to [1.3x (crop)] or [1.6x (crop)], [X1.3]
or [X1.6] will be displayed when starting the magnified view.
In magnified view, the exposure is locked. (Shutter speed and aperture
will be displayed in red.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274
MF: Focusing Manually
You can magnify the image and focus precisely with MF (manual focus).
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <MF>.
Turn the lens’s focusing ring to focus
1
roughly.
Display the magnifying frame.
Press the <u> button.
X The magnifying frame will appear.
2
Magnifying frame
Move the magnifying frame.
3
Use <9> to move the magnifying
frame to the position where you want
to focus.
Pressing <9>, <0>, or <L> button
will return the magnifying frame to the
screen’s center.
Magnify the image.
4
Each time you press the <u> button,
the magnification within the frame will
change in the following sequence:
Normal view 9 1x 9 6x 9 16x
AE lock
While in magnified view, you can use
Magnified area position
<9> to scroll around the magnified
Magnification (Approx.)
image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
275
MF: Focusing Manually
Focus manually.
5
While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens’s focusing ring to focus.
After achieving focus, press the <u>
button to return to the normal view.
Take the picture.
6
Check the exposure, then press the
shutter button completely to take the
If [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] is set to [1.3x (crop)] or [1.6x (crop)], [X1.3]
or [X1.6] will be displayed when starting the magnified view.
When [1.3x (crop)] or [1.6x (crop)] is set, the magnifying frame will be
displayed larger than usual.
In magnified view, the exposure is locked. (Shutter speed and aperture
will be displayed in red.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276
General Live View Shooting Cautions
Image Quality
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in
the image.
If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period, the
camera’s internal temperature may rise, and image quality may
deteriorate. Always exit Live View shooting when you are not shooting.
If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is
high, image quality may deteriorate. Exit Live View shooting and wait a
few minutes before shooting again.
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live
View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red
<E> icon will appear.
The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. It is recommended that you temporarily exit Live View
shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again.
The red <E> icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Exit the Live View shooting or
turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.
Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period
will cause the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not
shooting, always turn off the camera.
If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot
with high ISO speed or long exposure may deteriorate even before the
white <s> icon is displayed.
Shooting Results
In magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in
red. If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come
out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.
Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be captured
in the normal view range.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
277
General Live View Shooting Cautions
Live View Image
Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect
the brightness of the captured image.
Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed
Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image
recorded will have less noise. (The image quality of the Live View image
is different from that of the recorded image.)
If the light source (illumination) within the image changes, the screen
may flicker. If this happens, exit Live View shooting and resume Live
View shooting under the actual light source.
If you point the camera in a different direction, it may throw off the Live
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness
level stabilizes before shooting.
If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image
will correctly show the bright area.
In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a bright setting, noise
or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image. However, the
noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image.
When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more
pronounced than in the actual image.
Custom Functions
During Live View shooting, some Custom Functions will not work
Lens and Flash
If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may decrease the number of
possible shots. If you use a tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not
necessary, it is recommended that you set the IS switch to <2>.
The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when
using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode,
available since the second half of 2011.
FE lock and modeling flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278
8
Shooting Movies
Movie shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <k>.
If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera
shake can cause blurred movies. Using a tripod is
recommended.
Full HD 1080
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High-
Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning
lines).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
279
k Shooting Movies
/
Autoexposure Shooting
When the shooting mode is set to <A>, <d>, or <F>, autoexposure
control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness. Exposure
control will be the same for all the shooting modes.
Set the Mode Dial to <A>, <d>,
or <F>.
1
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
2 shooting switch to <k>.
X The reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.
Focus on the subject.
3
Before shooting a movie, focus with
When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method.
Shoot the movie.
4
Press the <0> button to start
shooting a movie.
X While the movie is being shot, the
“o” mark will be displayed on the
upper right of the screen.
Recording movies
X Sound will be recorded by the built-in
microphone.
To stop shooting the movie, press the
<0> button again.
Built-in microphone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280
k Shooting Movies
Shutter-priority AE
When the shooting mode is <s>, you can manually set the shutter
speed for movie shooting. The ISO speed and aperture will be set
automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure.
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
1
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
2 shooting switch to <k>.
Set the desired shutter speed.
While looking at the LCD monitor,
3
turn the <6> dial. The settable
shutter speeds depend on the frame
rate.
• 6 5 4:
Shutter speed
1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.
• 8 7: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.
Focus and shoot the movie.
4
The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
Changing the shutter speed during movie shooting is not recommended
since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.
If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
281
k Shooting Movies
Aperture-priority AE
When the shooting mode is <f>, you can manually set the aperture
for movie shooting. The ISO speed and shutter speed will be set
automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure.
Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
1
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
2 shooting switch to <k>.
Set the desired aperture.
While looking at the LCD monitor,
3
turn the <6> dial.
Aperture
Focus and shoot the movie.
4
The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
Changing the aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since
variations in the exposure, due to the drive of the lens aperture, will be
recorded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282
k Shooting Movies
ISO Speed in the <A> Mode
The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 6400.
ISO Speed in the <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F> Modes
The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 6400.
Under [z2: ISO speed settings], if you set the [ISO speed
range]’s [Maximum] setting to [H (12800)] in the <d>, <f>, or
(equivalent to ISO 12800). Even if you set the [Maximum] and
[Minimum] to a narrower range than the default ISO range (ISO 100
- ISO 6400), it will not take effect.
automatic ISO range will be ISO 200 - ISO 6400.
Under [z2: ISO speed settings], [Auto ISO range] and [Min.
ISO speed settings] cannot be selected in the <s> mode.
If [Minimum] is set to [L(50)] in [ISO speed range], and you switch from still
photo shooting to movie shooting, the minimum setting for automatic ISO
range for movie shooting will be ISO 100. It cannot be expanded to ISO 50.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
283
k Shooting Movies
Notes for <A>, < d>, <s>, <f>, and <F> Modes
In the <A> mode, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera
is displayed on the upper left of the screen (p.285).
You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the <A> button
displayed for the time length set with [z6: Metering timer]. After
applying AE lock during movie shooting, you can cancel it by pressing
the <S> button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the <S>
button.)
You can set exposure compensation up to ±3 stops by setting the
<R> switch to the left and turning the <5> dial (except in the
<A> mode).
Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the ISO speed and shutter
speed at the screen bottom. This is the exposure setting for taking a still
Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting may differ from that for
still photo shooting.
In the <A>, <d>, and <F> modes, the shutter speed and aperture will
not be recorded in the movie’s Exif information.
Using an EX-series Speedlite (Sold Separately)
Equipped with an LED Light
During movie shooting in the <A>, <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F>
modes, this camera supports the function that turns on the Speedlite’s
LED light automatically in low-light conditions. For detailed
instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284
k Shooting Movies
Scene Icons
During movie shooting in the <A> mode, an icon representing the
scene detected by the camera will be displayed, and the shooting will
be adapted to that scene. For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the
icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
Subject
Non-Portrait
Background
Color
*1
Portrait
Nature and
Outdoor Scene
*2
Close
Background
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky Included
Backlit
Light blue
Orange
*3
*3
Sunset
Spotlight
Dark
Dark blue
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension
Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
285
k Shooting Movies
Manual Exposure Shooting
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for
movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for
advanced users.
Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
1
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
2 shooting switch to <k>.
Set the ISO speed.
3
Press the <m> button.
X The ISO speed setting screen will
appear on the LCD monitor.
Turn the <6> dial to set the ISO
speed.
For details on the ISO speed, see the
next page.
Set the shutter speed and
4 aperture.
Press the shutter button halfway and
check the exposure level indicator.
To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial. The settable shutter
speeds vary depending on the frame
rate.
Shutter speed
• 6 5 4:
1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.
• 8 7: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.
To set the aperture, turn the <5>
dial.
Aperture
If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch to the left, then turn the <6>
or <5> dial.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286
k Shooting Movies
Focus and shoot the movie.
5
The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
ISO Speed in the <a> Mode
With [Auto] (A), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO
100 - ISO 6400. Under [z2: ISO speed settings], if you set [ISO
automatic ISO range will not expand to the H maximum. Even if you
set the [Maximum] and [Minimum] to a narrower range than the
default ISO range (ISO 100 - ISO 6400), it will not take effect.
You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 6400 in
1/3-stop increments. Under [z2: ISO speed settings], if you set
[ISO speed range]’s [Maximum] setting to [H (12800)], the manual
ISO speed setting range’s maximum will be expanded to H
(equivalent to ISO 12800). You can also set the [Maximum] and
[Minimum] to a range narrower than the default range (ISO 100 -
ISO 6400).
or manual ISO setting range will be ISO 200 or higher.
Under [z2: ISO speed settings], [Auto ISO range] and [Min.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
287
k Shooting Movies
If [Minimum] is set to [L(50)] in [ISO speed range], and you switch from
still photo shooting to movie shooting, the minimum setting for manual
ISO range for movie shooting will be ISO 100. It cannot be expanded to
ISO 50.
Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not
recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.
If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
Under [83: Custom Controls], if [s: Expo comp (hold btn, turn
is set.
When Auto ISO is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed.
If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
compared to when the <A> button was pressed.
By pressing the <B> button, you can display the histogram.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288
k Shooting Movies
Information Display
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
Maximum burst
Movie shooting remaining time*/Elapsed time
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Battery level
Possible shots/Seconds
remaining on self-timer
Movie shooting mode/
Scene icon
Temperature warning
Histogram (a mode)
Time code
:
Autoexposure (A)
:Autoexposure (d/F
)
Writing indicator
:Shutter-priority
:Aperture-priority
:Manual exposure
a :Time-lapse movie
Card for recording
Card
Recording movie
AF method
Drive mode
Image-recording
quality
Movie recording size
Frame rate
White balance
Picture Style
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Compression
method
Exposure mode
L: Autoexposure
:Shutter-
Movie Servo AF
priority AE
Aperture-
Recording level: Manual
LED light
:
priority AE
K: Manual
exposure
AE lock
Attenuator
Eye-Fi card transmission status
Shutter speed
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
Wind filter
Digital compass
Recording level meter
Aperture
Exposure level indicator
GPS connection indicator
Exposure compensation
* Applies to a single movie clip.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
289
k Shooting Movies
Note that if the AF method is set to [u +Tracking] or the camera is
cannot be displayed.
The electronic level, grid lines, or histogram cannot be displayed during
movie shooting. (The display will disappear when you start shooting a
movie.)
When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will
change to the elapsed time.
Cautions for Movie Shooting
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
If you shoot something that has fine detail, moire or false colors may result.
Under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.], even if [Record func.] is set
CF card [f] and SD card [g]. If [Rec. separately] or [Rec. to multiple]
is set, the movie will be recorded to the card which is set for [Playback].
If <Q> or <Qw> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during
movie shooting, the white balance may also change.
If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie may flicker.
Zooming the lens during movie shooting is not recommended. Zooming
the lens may cause changes in the exposure to be recorded regardless
of whether the lens’s maximum aperture changes or not.
When an SD card is selected as a card to record images and you cannot
shoot movies even if the card still has storage capacity, transfer the
images recorded on the card to a computer, etc. then format the card.
During movie shooting, you cannot magnify the image even if you press
the <u> button.
If you connect or disconnect the HDMI cable during movie shooting, the
movie shooting will end.
If necessary, also read General Live View Shooting Cautions on
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290
k Shooting Movies
Notes for Movie Shooting
<A> mode, they are under the [z2] and [z3] tabs.
A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. If the file size exceeds
4 GB, a new file will be created for every subsequent approx. 4 GB.
The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (when the movie
recording size is set to L).
You can also focus on the image by pressing the <p> button.
Under [z5: V button function], if [
/k] [q/k] is selected, you
can press the shutter button completely to start or stop the movie
Most external microphones (commercially available) equipped with a
3.5 mm diameter mini plug can be used.
and stop the movie shooting if the drive mode is <Q> or <k>. Set
the shooting timing switch to <2> (2-sec. delay), then press the transmit
button. If the switch is set to <o> (immediate shooting), still photo
shooting will take effect.
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the total movie recording time
will be as follows: At room temperature (23°C/73°F): Approx. 1 hr. 30
min., At low temperatures (0°C/32°F): Approx. 1 hr. 25 min. (with [z4:
Movie Servo AF: Disable] set).
The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting when using a
(super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode, available
since the second half of 2011.
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact
burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or
very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
291
k Shooting Movies
Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation shows the results of the current settings for
Picture Style, white balance and other functions in the image so you can
see what the captured image will look like.
During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically show the
effects of the settings listed below.
Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting
Picture Style
* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be
reflected.
White balance
White balance correction
Exposure
Depth of field (except during time-lapse movie shooting)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Highlight tone priority
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292
k Shooting Movies
Shooting Still Photos
While shooting a movie, you can also
take a still photo by pressing the shutter
button completely.
Taking Still Photos During Movie Shooting
If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will record
a still moment lasting approx. 1 sec.
The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie
shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is
displayed.
The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the card.
Under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.], if [Record func.]
still photos will be recorded to the same card. If [Rec. separately] or
[Rec. to multiple] is set, the movies will be recorded to the card set
image-recording quality set for the respective card.
Functions particular to still photo shooting are shown below.
Function
Settings
As set in [z1: Image quality].
Image-
recording
Quality
When the movie recording size is [1920x1080] or [1280x720], the
aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the size is [640x480], the aspect
ratio will be 4:3.
• <A>: ISO 100 - ISO 3200
• <d>, <f>, and <F>: ISO 100 - ISO 3200
• <s>: ISO 100 - ISO 6400
ISO Speed*
• <A>, <d>, and <F>: Automatically-set shutter speed and
aperture.
• <s>: Manually-set shutter speed and automatically-set aperture.
• <f>: Manually-set aperture and automatically-set shutter speed.
• <a>: Manually-set shutter speed and aperture.
Exposure
Setting
* If highlight tone priority is set, the ISO speed range will start from ISO 200.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
293
k Shooting Movies
If [z5: V button function] is set to [
cannot take still photos.
Still photo shooting during movie shooting will have approx. 100%
coverage with L, w, and x (when the image-recording quality is
set to JPEG 73).
AEB cannot be used.
Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.
Continuous still photo shooting is possible during movie shooting.
However, the captured images will not be displayed on the screen.
Depending on the still photo’s image-recording quality, number of shots
during continuous shooting, card performance, etc., movie shooting may
stop automatically.
AF is possible during movie shooting. However, the following may occur:
• Focus may become far off momentarily.
• The brightness of the recorded movie may change.
• The recorded movie may be momentarily still.
• The movie may record the lens operation noise.
• If focus cannot be achieved, you cannot shoot still photos.
Exposure compensation up to ±3 stops can be applied for still photo
shooting during movie shooting.
If you want to shoot still photos continuously during movie shooting,
using a high-speed card is recommended. Setting a smaller image-
recording quality for still photos and shooting fewer continuous still
photos are also recommended.
You can shoot still photos in all drive modes.
The self-timer can be set before you start shooting a movie. During
movie shooting, the camera will switch to single-image shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294
Shooting Function Settings
B/R/f/i/A Settings
If you press the <n>, <o>, <m>, or <b> button while
the image is displayed on the LCD monitor, the setting screen will
appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to
set the respective function.
<m> button to set the ISO speed.
By pressing the <n> button and then the <B> button, you
can set WB shift and WB bracketing.
Note that the following cannot be set: <q> Metering mode, <y>
Flash exposure compensation, <w> HDR mode, and <P>
Multiple exposures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
295
Shooting Function Settings
Q Quick Control
In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, and <F> modes, the AF method,
Drive mode, Movie recording size, Recording level (set manually
only), Recording/playing back card and image quality (still photos),
White balance, Picture Style, and Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set.
In the <A> mode, only the functions in bold above can be set.
Press the <Q> button (7).
1
X The settable functions will be
displayed.
Select a function and set it.
2
Use <9> to select a function.
X The setting of the selected function is
displayed on the screen.
Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it.
To set the image quality to RAW,
press <0>.
To select the card for recording/
playing back, WB shift/bracketing, or
Picture Style parameters, press the
<
B
> button.
To set Auto white balance, select
], then press < >.
[Q
0
Pressing <0> will return the camera
to movie shooting.
If you press the <Q> button before starting the time-lapse movie shooting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
With [z4: Movie rec. size] (the [z2]
tab in <A>), you can set the movie’s
image size, frame rate (frames per sec.),
and compression method.
The frame rate displayed on the [Movie
rec. size] screen switches automatically
depending on the [53: Video system]
setting (p.467).
Image Size
L 1920x1080
Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality. The aspect ratio is
16:9.
w 1280x720
High-Definition (HD) recording quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.
x 640x480
Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect ratio is 4:3.
Frame Rate (fps: frames per second)
6 29.97 fps/8 59.94 fps
For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North America, Japan,
South Korea, Mexico, etc.).
5 25.00 fps/7 50.00 fps
For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,
Australia, etc.).
4 23.98 fps
Mainly for motion pictures.
If you change the [53: Video system] setting, set the movie recording size
again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
297
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
Compression Method
W ALL-I (For editing/I-only)
Compresses one frame at a time for recording. Although the file size
is larger than with IPB (Standard), the movie is more suited for
editing.
X IPB (Standard)
Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording. Since
the file size is smaller than with ALL-I (For editing), you can shoot
longer (with a card of the same capacity).
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
(Approx.)
Total Recording Time on Card
Movie Recording
Quality
File Size
4 GB
8 GB
16 GB
65
4
W
5 min.
11 min.
23 min.
654MB/min.
L
65
4
X
16 min.
33 min.
67 min.
26 min.
225MB/min.
583MB/min.
87
87
W
X
X
6 min.
19 min.
48 min.
13 min.
38 min.
w
1 hr. 17 min. 196MB/min.
x 65
1 hr. 37 min. 3 hr. 14 min. 78MB/min.
shooting to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting
without interruption.
During movie shooting, approx. 30 sec. before the movie reaches
the 4 GB file size, the elapsed shooting time or time code displayed
in the movie-shooting screen will start blinking. If you keep shooting
until the movie file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be
created automatically and the elapsed shooting time or time code
will stop blinking.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file
individually. Movie files cannot be played back automatically in
consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next
movie and play it back.
Movie Shooting Time Limit
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If
the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by
pressing the <0> button. (A new movie file starts being recorded.)
When shooting movies, if the file size exceeds 4 GB, “buSY” may be
displayed on the LCD panel for a while. Still photo shooting is not possible
while “buSY” is displayed on the screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
299
3 Setting the Sound Recording
You can shoot movies while recording
sound with the built-in monaural
microphone or an external stereo
microphone (commercially available).
You can also freely adjust the sound-
recording level.
Sound-recording settings are under
[z4: Sound recording] (the [z2] tab
in <A>).
Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level
Auto
: The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto
level control will operate automatically in response to the
sound level.
Manual
: For advanced users. You can adjust the sound-recording
level to one of 64 levels.
Select [Rec. level] and look at the level meter while
turning the <5> dial to adjust the sound-recording level.
Look at the peak hold indicator, and adjust so that the
level meter sometimes lights up on the right of the “12” (-
12 dB) mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the
sound will be distorted.
Disable
: Sound will not be recorded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300
3 Setting the Sound Recording
Wind Filter/Attenuator
Wind filter
: When [Enable] is set, it reduces the wind noise when
recording outdoors. This feature takes effect only with
the built-in microphone. Note that [Enable] reduces
low bass sounds, so set it to [Disable] when there is
no wind. It will record a more natural sound than with
[Enable].
Attenuator
: Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by
loud noises. Even if [Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or
[Manual] before shooting, sound distortion may still
result if there is a very loud sound. In such a case,
setting it to [Enable] is recommended.
Using a microphone
Normally, the built-in microphone will record monaural sound.
Stereo sound recording is also possible by connecting an external
stereo microphone (commercially available) equipped with a
miniature stereo plug (φ3.5 mm) to the camera’s external
In the <A> mode, [Sound recording] can be set to [On] or [Off]. If [On]
is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted automatically (same as
with [Auto]), but the wind filter function will not take effect.
The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be
adjusted.
Audio is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
sound-recording level with the <h> touch pad with less operation noise
during movie shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
301
3 Silent ControlN
You can change the settings of the ISO speed, sound-recording level,
etc. without making too much noise while shooting a movie.
When [z5: Silent Control] is set to
[Enable h], you can use the touch pad
<h> on the inner ring of the Quick
Control Dial.
You can just touch the top, bottom, left,
or right of <h> for silent operation.
During movie shooting, you can press
the <Q> button to display the Quick
Control screen and change the functions
below with <h>.
Shooting Mode
Settable Functions
d/F s f
a
k
Shutter speed
Aperture
-
-
k
-
-
k
k
-
k
1
Exposure compensation
k
-
k
-
k*
k
ISO speed
2
Recording level
*
k
k
k
k
*1: With Auto ISO set.
*2: With [Sound recording: Manual] set.
If [z5: Silent Control] is set to [Enable h], you cannot change Quick
Control settings with the < > Quick Control dial during movie shooting.
5
Even if you change the aperture silently with <h>, the movie will still
record the lens aperture-driving sound.
If there is water or dirt on the <h>, the touch operation may not work. In
such a case, use a clean cloth to clean the <h>. If it still does not work,
wait a while and try again.
Before shooting a movie, you can use <h> with the [Rec. level] setting to
adjust the sound-recording level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
302
3 Setting the Time Code
The time code is a time reference
recorded automatically to synchronize
the movie during movie shooting. It is
recorded at all times in the following
units: hours, minutes, seconds, and
frames. It is mainly used during movie
editing.
Use [z5: Time code] (the [z3] tab in
<A>) to set the time code.
Count Up
Rec run
: The time code counts up only while you are shooting a
movie. The time code will continue in the sequence of the
movie files captured.
Free run : The time code counts up whether you are shooting a
movie or not.
Start Time Setting
You can set the time code’s start time.
Manual input setting : You can freely set the hour, minute, second,
and frames.
Reset
: The time set with [Manual input setting] and
[Set to camera time] is reset to “00:00:00.” or
“00:00:00:” (p.305).
Set to camera time : Sets hours, minutes, and seconds to match the
camera’s internal clock. “Frames” will be set to
00.
Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy
between the actual time and time code.
If [Free run] is set and you change the time, zone, or daylight saving
time (p.49), the time code will be affected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
303
3 Setting the Time Code
Movie Recording Count
You can select what to display on the movie shooting screen.
Rec time
: Indicates the elapsed time from the start of the movie
shooting.
Time code : Indicates the time code during movie shooting.
Movie Playback Count
You can select what to display on the movie playback screen.
Rec time
: Displays the recording time and playback time during
movie playback.
Time code : Displays the time code during movie playback.
With [Time code] set:
During movie shooting
During movie playback
Regardless of the [Movie rec count] setting, the time code will always
be recorded to the movie file (except during time-lapse movie shooting).
The [Movie play count] setting under [z5: Time code] switches in
tandem with the [x3: Movie play count] setting. Changing either
setting will automatically change the other.
“Frames” are not displayed for movie shooting or during movie playback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304
3 Setting the Time Code
Drop Frame
If the frame rate setting is 6 (29.97 fps) or 8 (59.94 fps), the time
code’s frame count causes a discrepancy between the actual time and
time code. This discrepancy can be corrected automatically. This
correction function is called “drop frame.”
Enable : The discrepancy is corrected automatically by skipping time
code numbers (DF: Drop frame).
Disable : The discrepancy is not corrected (NDF: Non-drop frame).
The time code will be displayed as follows:
Enable (DF)
Disable (NDF)
: 00:00:00. (Playback time: 00:00:00.00)
: 00:00:00: (Playback time: 00:00:00:00)
If the frame rate is
frame is not used. (If
[
4
(23.98 fps),
is set or if [53: Video system] is set to [For PAL],
Drop frame] will not be displayed.)
5
(25.00 fps), or
7(50.00 fps), drop
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
305
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
Still photos shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically
to create a time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows how a subject
changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual time it took. It
is effective for a fixed-point observation of changing scenery, growing
plants, celestial motion, etc.
Time-lapse movies are recorded in L 6 W (NTSC) or L 5
W (PAL). The frame rate will be switched automatically according to
Select the shooting mode.
1
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
2 shooting switch to <k>.
X The image will appear on the LCD
monitor.
Select [Time-lapse movie].
3
Under the [z5] tab, select [Time-
lapse movie] (the [z3] tab in
<A>), then press <0>.
If [Time-lapse movie] is grayed out,
press the <0> button to enable
movie shooting. Then perform step 3
again.
Select [Enable].
Select [Enable], then press <B>.
4
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or
an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or
the camera’s internal components.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
306
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
Set the shooting interval and
5 number of shots.
Check the [k: Time required] and
[3: Playback time] displayed at the
bottom of the screen to set the
shooting interval and number of shots.
Select the number to be set (hours:
minutes: seconds / Number of shots).
Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to <s>).
Time required Playback time
Shooting interval
Settable from [00:00:01] to [99:59:59].
Number of shots
Settable from [0002] to [3600]. Set one digit at a time. If 3600 is set,
the time-lapse movie will be approx. 2 min. for NTSC and approx. 2
min. 24 sec. for PAL.
Select [OK].
X The screen in step 3 will reappear.
6
7
Check the settings.
With [Time-lapse movie] selected on
the screen in step 3, press <0>.
X The current settings will be displayed.
Time required
Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots at the
set interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.
Playback time
Indicates the playback time (time required to play back the movie) of
the time-lapse movie that will be created from the still photos taken
at the set interval and recorded in L 6 W (NTSC) or L
5 W (PAL).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
307
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
Card- time left
The total length of a time-lapse movie that can be recorded on the
card based on its remaining capacity.
Exit the menu.
Press the <M> button to turn off
8
the menu screen.
Read the message.
9
Read the message and select [OK].
Take test shots.
10
Set the exposure and shooting
functions, and press the shutter
button halfway to focus as you do
with Live View shooting.
Press the shutter button completely to
start taking test shots. The test
images will be recorded to the card.
If there are no problems with the test
shots, go to the next step.
To take test shots again, repeat this
step.
Press the <0> button.
11
X The camera will be ready to start
shooting a time-lapse movie.
To return to step 9, press the <0>
button again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
308
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
Shoot the time-lapse movie.
12
Press the shutter button halfway to
check the focus and exposure.
Press the shutter button completely to
start shooting the time-lapse movie.
AF will not work during time-lapse
movie shooting. The exposure setting
for the first shot will be applied to
subsequent shots.
Shots remaining
During time-lapse movie shooting,
nothing will be displayed on the LCD
monitor. <a> will blink on the LCD
panel.
Time-lapse movie
Since the electronic shutter is used
for shooting, the reflex mirror and
shutter make no operation noise
during time-lapse movie shooting.
When the set number of shots are
taken, the time-lapse movie shooting
will stop and be automatically canceled.
Using a tripod is recommended.
Taking test shots is recommended.
Regardless of the [z1: Image quality] setting, the time-lapse movie will
be recorded in L 6 W (NTSC) or L 5 W (PAL).
To cancel the time-lapse movie shooting before it is completed, either
press the shutter button completely or press the <0> button ([Disable]
is set). The time-lapse movie shot so far will be recorded on the card.
You can play back the shot time-lapse movie with this camera the same
way that you play back normal movies.
If the time required for shooting is 24 hours to 48 hours, “2 days” will be
indicated. If three or more days are required, the number of days will be
indicated in 24-hour increments.
Even if the time-lapse movie’s playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie
file will still be created. For [Playback time], “00:00:00” will be displayed.
If the shooting time is long, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold
separately) is recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
309
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
With time-lapse movie set to [Enable], you cannot set [z4: Movie rec.
size] and [53: Video system].
If the camera is connected to a computer or printer with the interface
cable, or if an HDMI cable is connected to the camera, you cannot select
[Enable].
The maximum ISO speed will be ISO 3200 in the <d>, <s>, <f>,
and <F> modes, and <a> mode with Auto ISO set.
Bulb exposure cannot be performed. If the shooting mode is <F>, the
operation will be the same as the <d> mode.
Movie Servo AF will not function.
If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or slower, the exposure of the movie
displayed may not reflect the exposure of the resulting movie.
Do not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie shooting. Zooming the
lens may cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change,
and the lens aberration correction not to function properly.
When shooting a time-lapse movie under a flickering light, noticeable
image flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures may be
recorded.
The image displayed during time-lapse movie shooting and the resulting
movie may look different (in terms of flicker, depth of field, etc.).
If you move the camera from left to right (panning) or shoot a moving
subject while shooting a time-lapse movie, the image may look extremely
distorted.
During time-lapse movie shooting, auto power off will not operate. Also,
you cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function settings, or
play back images.
Sound and time code are not recorded for time-lapse movies.
Single shooting setting is applied to time-lapse movie shooting
regardless of the drive mode setting.
The shooting function settings for the first shot will be applied to
subsequent shots.
If a long exposure or shutter speed longer than the shooting interval is
set, the camera cannot shoot with the set interval. Also, shooting may
not be performed when the shutter speed and the shooting interval are
nearly the same.
If the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may
make the time-lapse movie’s recording time shorter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
310
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the interval between
shots due to the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the
shots may not be taken with the set intervals.
The captured images are not recorded as still photos. Even if you cancel
the time-lapse movie shooting after only one shot is taken, it will be
recorded as a movie file.
If the card does not have enough free space to record the set number of
shots, [Playback time] will be displayed in red. Although the camera can
continue shooting, the shooting will stop when the card becomes full.
If you connect the camera to a computer with the interface cable
provided with the camera and use EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z5:
Time-lapse movie] to [Disable]. If it is set to [Enable], the camera
cannot communicate with the computer.
During time-lapse movie shooting, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will not operate.
If the power switch is set to <2> or the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is operated, time-lapse movie shooting will be terminated
and the setting is switched to [Disable].
Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.
Shooting-ready state of the time-lapse movie is canceled and the setting
is switch to [Disable] with any of the following operations:
• Selecting [z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning], [54: Clear
all camera settings], or [54: zfirmware ver.].
• Selecting <w>, <x>, or <y> shooting modes.
When time-lapse movie shooting ends, the settings are cleared
automatically, and you return to normal movie shooting. Note that if you
have set the shutter speed slower than 1/60 sec. or faster than 1/4000
sec. for time-lapse movie shooting and the settings are automatically
cleared, the shutter speed may be automatically changed to a speed
within the settable range for normal movie shooting.
displayed, the image quality of the time-lapse movie may deteriorate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
311
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
You can perform time-lapse movie shooting with a fully-charged Battery
Pack LP-E6N for the durations (from start of shooting until the battery is
exhausted) listed in the table below.
Total Possilbe Time for Time-lapse Movie Shooting
Room Temperature Low Temperatures
(23°C / 73°F)
2 hr. 15 min.
4 hr. 5 min.
(0°C / 32°F)
2 hr. 10 min.
3 hr. 55 min.
Shooting interval: 1sec.
Shooting interval: 10sec.
the time-lapse movie shooting with the drive mode set to <Q> or <k>.
When Using Remote Controller RC-6
Camera Status/Remote
Control Setting
<o> (Immediate
<2> (2-sec. delay)
shooting)
Test-shooting screen
Shooting-ready
To shooting-ready
Shoots still photo
Starts shooting
To test-shooting screen
During time-lapse movie
shooting
Ends shooting
Ends shooting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
312
3 Menu Function Settings
z4
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <k>, the
movie shooting menu options will appear
under the [z4] and [z5] tabs (the
[z2] and [z3] tabs in <A>).
Movie Servo AF
During movie shooting, the camera focuses on the subject
continuously. The default setting is [Disable].
When [Enable] is set:
y The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you
are not pressing the shutter button halfway.
y Since this drives the lens continuously, it will consume battery
power and shorten the total possible movie shooting time (p.291).
y With certain lenses, the lens operation noise during focusing may
be recorded. If this happens, use an external microphone
(commercially available) to reduce lens operation noise in the
movie.
y If you want to set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> during
Movie Servo AF, first set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting
switch to <A>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
313
3 Menu Function Settings
y If you want to keep the focus at a specific point or you do not
want the lens operation noise to be recorded, you can
temporarily stop Movie Servo AF by pressing the button assigned
to [Pause Movie Servo AF] or [AF stop] under [83: Custom
controls]. When you stop Movie Servo AF, the AF point will turn
gray.
• Under [83: Custom controls], if a button is assigned to
while holding down that button. When you press the button
again, Movie Servo AF will resume.
will stop while holding down that button. When you let go of
the button, Movie Servo AF will resume.
y When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie shooting
after pressing the <M> or <x> button or performing other
operations such as changing the AF method, Movie Servo AF will
resume automatically.
When [Disable] is set:
y Press the shutter button halfway or press the <p> button to
focus.
Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
• A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera.
• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page
273.
Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnified view.
During movie shooting, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the
camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie
image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image
magnification).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
314
3 Menu Function Settings
AF method
Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you
compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the
subject.
Note that the grid is not displayed during movie shooting.
Movie recording size
You can set the movie recording size (image size, frame rate, and
Sound recording
You can set sound-recording settings. For details, see page 300.
z5
Silent LV shootingN
This function applies to still photo shooting. For details, see page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
315
3 Menu Function Settings
Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
Time code
Silent ControlN
When [Enable h] is set, you can use the touch pad <h> and
Quick Control screen to change settings silently during movie
shooting. For details, see page 302.
V button functionN
You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button
halfway or completely during movie shooting.
Setting
Pressed Halfway
Metering and AF
Metering only
Pressed Completely
Still photo shooting
/z
q/z
Still photo shooting
Metering and AF
Metering only
Starts/stops movie shooting
Starts/stops movie shooting
/k
q/k
If [
/k] or [q/k] is set, besides pressing the <0> button,
you can start/stop the movie shooting by pressing the shutter button
completely or by using Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote
[
During movie shooting, the [V button function] setting overrides any
function assigned to the shutter button with [83: Custom Controls].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
316
General Movie Shooting Cautions
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie shooting
or under a high ambient temperature, a white < > or red < > icon will appear.
s
E
The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. It is recommended that you stop still photo shooting for a
while and allow the camera to cool down. Since movie image quality will
hardly be affected, you can still shoot movies.
The red <E> icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the <
> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, always turn off the camera.
Recording and Image Quality
If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
s> or
<E
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie
shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots. If you use a
tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, it is recommended that
you set the IS switch to <2>.
The camera’s built-in microphone will also pick up camera operation
noise. Use an external microphone (commercially available) to reduce
camera operation noise in the movie.
Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal.
With autoexposure shooting or shutter-priority AE, if the brightness
changes during movie shooting, the movie may freeze temporarily. In
such cases, shoot movies with aperture-priority AE or manual exposure.
If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. The movie will be recorded almost
exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
In low light, noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. The movie
will be recorded almost exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may
deteriorate or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support
MOV format).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
317
General Movie Shooting Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level
indicator may appear on the right of the screen during
movie shooting. It indicates how much data has not
yet been written to the card (remaining capacity of the
internal buffer memory). The slower the card, the
faster the indicator will climb upward. If the indicator
becomes full, movie shooting will stop automatically.
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will
Indicator
either not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward. First,
shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.
If the indicator indicates that the card is full and movie shooting stops
automatically, the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded
properly.
If the card’s writing speed decreases (due to fragmentation) and the
Still Photo Shooting during Movie Shooting
Regarding the image quality of still photos, see “Image Quality” on page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
318
9
Image Playback
This chapter explains how to play back or erase photos
and movies, how to display them on a TV screen, and
other playback-related functions.
Images shot and saved with another device
The camera may not be able to properly display images captured
with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their
file names changed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
319
x Image Playback
Single-Image Display
1
Play back the image.
Press the <x> button.
X The last image captured or played
back will appear.
Select an image.
2
To play back images starting with the
last image captured, turn the <5>
dial counterclockwise. To play back
images starting with the first captured
image, turn the dial clockwise.
Each time you press the <B>
button, the information display will
change.
No information
Basic information display
Shooting information display
When you play back RAW images shot with the [z4: Crop/aspect ratio]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
320
x Image Playback
Exit the image playback.
3
Press the <x> button to exit the
image playback and return to
shooting-ready state.
Shooting Information Display
With the shooting information screen displayed (p.320), you can tilt
<9> up or down to change the shooting information displayed at the
Detailed information
Lens aberration correction information
Color space / Noise reduction information
Picture Style information 2
Lens / Histogram information
White balance information
Picture Style information 1
3 Grid Display
In single-image display and two-image
on the image playback.
With [33: Playback grid], you can
select [3x3 l], [6x4 m], or [3x3+diag
n].
This function is convenient for checking
the image’s vertical or horizontal tilt as
well as composition.
The grid is not displayed during movie playback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
321
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Information for Still Photos
Basic information display
Rating
Protect images
Card
Eye-Fi transfer completed
Eye-Fi card transmission status
Battery level
Playback number/
Folder number -
File number
Total images
recorded
Shutter speed
Aperture
Image-recording
quality/Edited
images/Cropping
Highlight tone priority
ISO speed
Exposure compensation
amount
If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information
may not be displayed.
It may not be possible to play back images taken with the EOS 5DS/EOS
5DS R on other cameras.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
322
B: Shooting Information Display
Shooting information display
• Detailed information
Exposure compensation amount
Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
Aperture
Shooting date
and time
Shutter speed
ISO speed
Shooting mode/
Scroll bar
Multiple exposure
Highlight tone priority
White balance
Metering mode
File size
Flash exposure compensation
amount/HDR shooting/
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
White balance correction/
Correction amount
Crop
Image-recording quality/
Edited images/Cropping
AF Microadjustment
Picture Style/Settings
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image file size will be
displayed.
* Lines indicating the shooting area will be displayed for images taken with the
crop/aspect ratio set and with RAW or RAW+JPEG set for image quality.
* Lines indicating the shooting area will be displayed for images with cropping
information appended (p.411).
* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, <0> will be
displayed.
* <w> and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be displayed for images
shot with HDR shooting.
* <P> will be displayed for multiple-exposure photos.
* <M> will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
* For still photos taken during movie shooting, <G> will be displayed.
* For images that are processed (RAW processing function, resized, or cropped)
and then saved, <u> will be displayed.
* For images cropped and then saved, <N> will be displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
323
B: Shooting Information Display
• Lens/Histogram information
Histogram display
(Brightness)
Lens name
Histogram display
(RGB)
Focal length
• White balance information
• Picture Style information 1
• Color space / Noise
reduction information
• Picture Style information 2
• Lens aberration correction information
If you used GPS Receiver GP-E2 to record GPS information for the image,
tilt <9> up or down to view the “GPS information” screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
324
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Movie Information Display
Movie playback
Aperture
Shutter speed
ISO speed
Movie shooting mode/
Time-lapse movie
File size
Movie recording size
Frame rate
Recording time/Time code
Compression method
• < > and < > modes: Shutter speed, aperture and ISO speed are not
displayed.
• < > mode: Aperture and ISO speed are not displayed.
• < > mode: Shutter speed and ISO speed are not displayed.
• < > mode + Auto ISO: ISO speed is not displayed.
Highlight Alert
When [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable], overexposed,
clipped highlights will blink. To obtain more image detail in the
overexposed, blinking areas, set the exposure compensation to a
negative amount and shoot again.
AF Point Display
When [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable], the AF point that
achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF point
selection is set, multiple AF points may be displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
325
B: Shooting Information Display
Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and
overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color
saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [33:
Histogram disp.].
[Brightness] Display
Sample Histograms
This histogram is a graph showing the
distribution of the image’s brightness level. The
horizontal axis indicates the brightness level
(darker on the left and brighter on the right),
while the vertical axis indicates how many
pixels exist for each brightness level. The more
pixels there are toward the left, the darker the
image. The more pixels there are toward the
right, the brighter the image. If there are too
many pixels on the left, the shadow detail will be
lost. If there are too many pixels on the right, the
highlight detail will be lost. The gradation in-
Dark image
Normal brightness
Bright image
between will be reproduced. By checking the image and its
brightness histogram, you can see the exposure level inclination and
the overall gradation.
[RGB] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary
color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue).
The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on
the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates
how many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more
pixels there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the
color. The more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and
denser the color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the
respective color information will be lacking. If there are too many
pixels on the right, the color will be too saturated with no gradation.
By checking the image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s
saturation and gradation condition, as well as white balance
inclination.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326
x Searching for Images Quickly
H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)
You can search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9,
36, or 100 images on one screen.
Press the <u> button.
1
During image playback or when the
camera is ready to shoot, press the
<u> button.
X [6u] will be displayed on the lower
right of the screen.
Switch to the index display.
2
Turn the <6> dial counterclockwise.
X The 4-image index display will
appear. The selected image is
highlighted with an orange frame.
Turning the <6> dial further
counterclockwise will switch the
display from 9 images, 36 images
and to 100 images. If you turn the dial
clockwise, it will rotate through 100,
36, 9, 4, and single-image display.
B
B
B
B
Select an image.
3
Operate <
the orange frame and select the image.
Press the < > button to turn off the
6u] icon, then turn the < > dial to
go to the next screen or previous image.
9> or the <5> dial to move
u
[
6
Press <0> in the index display to
display the selected image in the
single-image display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
327
x Searching for Images Quickly
I Jump through Images (Jump Display)
In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through
the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.
Select [Image jump w/6].
1
Under the [32] tab, select [Image
jump w/6], then press <0>.
Select the jump method.
2
Select the jump method, then press
<0>.
d: Display images one by one
e: Jump 10 images
f: Jump 100 images
g: Display by date
h: Display by folder
i: Display movies only
j: Display stills only
P: Display protected images only
Turn the <6> dial to select.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
328
x Searching for Images Quickly
Browse by jumping.
Press the <x> button to play back
images.
3
In the single-image display, turn the
<6> dial.
X You can browse by the method that
was set.
Jump method
Playback position
To search images by shooting date, select [Date].
To search images by folder, select [Folder].
If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [Movies] or
[Stills] to display one or the other.
If no images match the [Protect] or [Rating] setting, you cannot browse
through images with the <6> dial.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
329
u Magnifying Images
You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 16x on the LCD
monitor.
Magnify the image.
1
The image can be magnified as
follows: 1. During image playback
(single-image display), 2. During the
image review after image capture,
and 3. From the shooting-ready state.
Press the <u> button.
X The magnified view will appear. The
magnified area and [6u] will be
displayed on the lower right of the
screen.
The image magnification increases
as you turn the <6> dial clockwise.
You can magnify the image up to
approx. 16x.
Magnified area position
The image magnification decreases
as you turn the <6> dial
counterclockwise. In the case of 1
and 3 only, turning the dial further will
display the index display (p.327).
Scroll around the image.
2
Use <9> to scroll around the
magnified image.
To exit the magnified view, press the
<u> button or <x> button and the
single-image display will return.
In the case of 1 and 3 only, you can turn the <5> dial to view another
image while the magnification is maintained.
A movie cannot be magnified.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
330
u Magnifying Images
3 Magnification Settings
Under the [33] tab, when you select
[Magnificatn (apx)], you can set the
starting magnification and initial position
for the magnified view.
1x (no magnification)
The image is not magnified. The magnified view will start with the
single-image display.
2x, 4x, 8x, 16x (magnify from center)
The magnified view starts at the image center at the selected
magnification.
Actual size (from selected point)
The recorded image’s pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%. The
magnified view starts at the AF point that achieved focus. If the
photo is taken with manual focus, the magnified view starts at the
image center.
Same as last magnification (from center)
The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the
magnified view with the <x> or <u> button. The magnified view
starts at the image center.
magnified view will start at the image center even if [Actual size (from
selected pt)] is set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
331
X
Comparing Images (Two-Image Display)
You can compare two images side by side on the LCD monitor. In the
two-image display, you can use magnified view or jump display as well
as protection, rating and erasure of images.
Set the two-image display.
1
During image playback, press the
<X> button.
X The two-image index display will
appear. The currently-selected image
will be highlighted with an orange
frame.
Select the images to be
2 compared.
Pressing <0> switches the orange
frame between the two images.
Turn the <5> dial to select an image.
Repeat this procedure to select the
other image to be compared.
If the left and right images are the
same, the [
] icon will appear on
the upper left of both images.
By pressing the <Q> button, you can
set the same magnification and
magnified area for both images. (The
magnification settings will match
those of the image not highlighted
with an orange frame.)
By holding the <x> button, you can
display the image highlighted with the
orange frame as a single image.
To return to the previous display,
press the <X> button.
By pressing the <B> button, you can change the information display.
You cannot play back movies in the two-image display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
332
b Rotating the Image
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.
Select [Rotate image].
1
Under the [31] tab, select [Rotate
image], then press <0>.
Select an image.
2
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be rotated.
You can also select an image in the
Rotate the image.
3
Each time you press <0>, the
image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90° 9 270° 9 0°.
To rotate another image, repeat steps
2 and 3.
shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.
If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during
image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
A movie cannot be rotated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
333
K Protecting Images
You can protect important images from being accidentally erased by the
camera’s erase function.
3 Protecting a Single Image
Select [Protect images].
1
Under the [31] tab, select [Protect
images], then press <0>.
Select [Select images].
2
X An image will be displayed.
Image protection icon
Select an image.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
3
image to be protected.
movie on the index display (p.327).
Protect the image.
4
Press <0> to protect the selected
image. The <K> icon will appear at
the top of the screen.
To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The <K> icon will
disappear.
To protect another image, repeat
steps 3 and 4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
334
K Protecting Images
3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [31:
Protect images], all the images in the
folder or on the card will be protected.
To cancel the image protection, select
[Unprotect all images in folder] or
[Unprotect all images on card].
Movies can also be protected.
Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the
protection.
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images
all at once.
When [All images on card] or [Unprotect all images on card] is
selected, the images will be protected or unprotected on the card
selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under [51: Record
func+card/folder sel.].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
335
K Protecting Images
Protecting Images with the <c> Button
During image playback, you can use the <c> button to protect an
image.
Select [m btn function].
1
Under the [53] tab, select [m
button function], then press <0>.
Select [Protect].
2
Select an image.
Press the <x> button to play back
3
images.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be protected.
You can also select an image or
movie on the index display (p.327).
Protect the image.
When you press the <c> button,
4
the image will be protected and the
<K> icon will appear.
To cancel the image protection, press
the <c> button again. The <K>
icon will disappear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
336
Setting Ratings
You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of the five rating
marks: l/m/n/o/p. This function is called rating.
Rating Images with the <c> Button
Select an image.
During image playback, turn the
1
<5> dial to select an image or movie
to be rated.
You can also select an image or
movie on the index display (p.327).
Rate the image.
Each time you press the <c>
2
button, the rating mark will change:
l/m/n/o/p/None.
To rate another image, repeat steps 1
and 2.
If [53: m btn function] is set to [Protect], change it to [Rating].
If you press the <Q> button when [Rating] is selected in [53: m btn
function], you can set the rating marks that can be selected when you
press the <c> button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
337
Setting Ratings
3 Setting Ratings with the Menu
Select [Rating].
Under the [32] tab, select [Rating],
then press <0>.
1
Select an image.
Turn the <5> dial to select an image
or movie to be rated.
2
If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a three-
image display. To return to the single-
image display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
Rate the image.
3
Press <0> and a blue highlight
frame will appear as shown in the
screenshot.
Turn the <5> dial to select a rating,
then press <0>.
X When you set a rating mark to the
image, the total number of the images
displayed beside the rating mark will
be counted up.
To rate another image, repeat steps 2
and 3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
338
Setting Ratings
A total of up to 999 images of a given rating can be displayed. If there are
more than 999 images with a given rating, [###] will be displayed.
Taking Advantage of Ratings
With [32: Image jump w/6], you can display only images having the
specified rating.
With [32: Slide show], you can play back only images with a specific
rating.
only the image with a specific rating (still photos only).
With Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, etc., you can see each file’s
rating as part of the file information display or in the provided image
viewer (JPEG images only).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
339
Q Quick Control for Playback
During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set the following:
[J: Protect images], [b: Rotate image], [9: Rating], [R: RAW
image processing (RAW images only)], [S: Resize (JPEG image
only)], [N: Cropping (JPEG images only)], [ : Highlight alert], [
AF point display], and [e: Image jump w/6].
:
For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.
Press the <Q> button.
1
During image playback, press the
<Q> button.
X The Quick Control options will
appear.
Select an item and set it.
2
Tilt <9> up or down to select a
function.
X The setting of the selected function is
displayed at the bottom.
Turn the <5> dial to set it.
For RAW image processing, Resize,
and Cropping, press <0> and set
the function. For details, see page
364 for RAW image processing, page
Cropping. To cancel, press the
<M> button.
Exit the setting.
Press the <Q> button to exit the
3
Quick Control screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
340
Q Quick Control for Playback
To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD]. If [OnD] or [Off] is
set, the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to the image, but the
camera will not rotate the image for display.
Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the
single-image display and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing
the <Q> button again will return to the index display.
For images taken with another camera, the options you can select may
be restricted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
341
k Enjoying Movies
You can play back movies in the following three ways:
Playback on a TV Set
(p.351)
By connecting the camera to a TV set
with HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately), you can play back the
camera’s still photos and movies on the
TV set.
Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN port, the camera
cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.
Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB
cable, movies and still photos cannot be played back or saved.
Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor
You can play back movies on the
camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit
out the movie’s first and last scenes, and
play back the still photos and movies on
the card in an automatic slide show.
A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played
back with the camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
342
k Enjoying Movies
Playback and Editing with a Computer
To play back or edit a movie, use pre-
installed or general-purpose software,
compatible with the movie’s recording
format.
If you play back or edit a movie with commercially-available software, use
software compatible with MOV-format movies. For details on commercially-
available software, contact the software manufacturer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
343
k Playing Back Movies
Play back the image.
Press the <x> button to display an
1
image.
Select a movie.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
movie to be played.
2
With the single-image display, the
<s1> icon displayed on the
upper left indicates a movie.
In the index display, perforations at the
left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As movies cannot be played
from the index display, press <
0>
to switch to the single-image display.
In the single-image display, press
3 <0>.
X The movie playback panel will appear
at the bottom of the screen.
Play back the movie.
4
Select [7] (Play), then press <0>.
X The movie will start playing back.
You can pause the movie playback by
pressing <0>.
You can adjust the sound volume
during movie playback by turning the
<6> dial.
For more details on the playback
procedure, see the next page.
Speaker
The camera may not be able to play back movies shot with another camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
344
k Playing Back Movies
Movie Playback Panel
Operation
Playback Description
7 Play
Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.
Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the <5> dial.
The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of
the screen.
8 Slow motion
5 First frame
Displays the movie’s first frame.
Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is
displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.
3 Previous frame
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-
frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the
movie.
6 Next frame
4 Last frame
X Edit
Displays the movie’s last frame.
Displays the editing screen (p.346).
Playback position
Playback time (minutes:seconds with [Movie play count:
Rec time] set)
mm’ ss”
hh:mm:ss.ff (DF)
Time code (hours:minutes:seconds:frames with [Movie
hh:mm:ss:ff (NDF) play count: Time code] set)
Turn the <6> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in
9 Volume
32
To return to the single-image display, press the <M>
button.
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the continuous playback time
at room temperature (23°C/73°F) will be approx. 3 hr. 20 min.
adjust the sound volume with the TV set. (Turning the <6> dial will not
change the sound volume.) If there is audio feedback, place the camera
farther away from the TV set or turn down the TV sound volume.
If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the still photo will be
displayed for approx. 1 sec. during the movie playback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
345
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.
increments. You can also edit time-lapse movies.
On the movie playback screen,
select [X].
X The movie editing panel will be
1
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Specify the part to be edited out.
2
Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or
[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.
Tilt <9> to the left or right to see the
previous or next frames. Holding
down the key will fast forward or fast
rewind the frames. Turn the <5> dial
for frame-by-frame playback.
After deciding which part to edit out,
press <0>. The portion highlighted
in white on the top of the screen is
what will remain.
Check the edited movie.
3
Select [7] and press <0> to play
back the edited movie.
To change the editing, go back to step
2.
To cancel the editing, press the
<M> button, then select [OK] on
the confirmation dialog.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
346
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
Save the edited movie.
4
Select [W], then press <0>.
X The save screen will appear.
To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.
On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK] to save the edited movie and
return to the movie playback screen.
Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position
indicated by [ ] on the top of the screen), the actual position where the
movie is edited may differ from the position you specified.
If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
When the battery level is low, movie editing is not possible. Use a fully-
charged battery.
Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
347
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
Select [Slide show].
1
Under the [32] tab, select [Slide
show], then press <0>.
Number of images to be played
back
Select the images to be played
2 back.
Select the desired option on the
screen, then press <0>.
All images/Movies/Stills/Protect
Select one of the following: [jAll
images] [kMovies] [zStills]
[JProtect]. Then press <0>.
Date/Folder/Rating
Select one of the following: [iDate]
[nFolder] [9Rating].
When <zH> is highlighted,
press the <B> button.
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Date
Folder
Rating
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
348
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Item
Playback Description
All the still photos and movies on the card will be played
back.
jAll images
Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date
will be played back.
iDate
Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played
back.
nFolder
kMovies
zStills
Only the movies on the card will be played back.
Only the still photos on the card will be played back.
Only the protected still photos and movies on the card will be
played back.
JProtected
9Rating
Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will
be played back.
Configure [Set up] as desired.
3
Select [Set up], then press <0>.
Set the [Display time] and [Repeat]
settings for still photos.
After completing the settings, press
the <M> button.
Display time
Repeat
The images on the card selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under
[51: Record func+card/folder sel.] will be played back.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
349
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Start the slide show.
4
Select [Start], then press <0>.
X After [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
Exit the slide show.
5
To exit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the <M>
button.
To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be
displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume
the slide show.
During auto playback, you can press the <B> button to change the
During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the
<6> dial.
During auto playback or pause, you can turn the <5> dial to view
another image.
During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.
The display time may vary depending on the image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
350
Viewing Images on a TV Set
By connecting the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable (sold
separately), you can play the camera’s still photos and movies on the
TV set. For the HDMI cable, HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is
recommended.
If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, set the [53: Video
system] correctly to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the video
system of your TV set).
Connect the HDMI cable to the
camera.
With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo
facing the front of the camera, insert it
into the <D> terminal.
1
Connect the HDMI cable to the TV
2 set.
Connect the HDMI cable to the TV
set’s HDMI IN port.
Turn on the TV set and switch the
3 TV set’s video input to select the
connected port.
Set the camera’s power switch to
4 <1>.
Press the <x> button.
5
X The image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected TV set.
By pressing the <B> button, you
can change the information display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
351
Viewing Images on a TV Set
Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot
be adjusted with the camera.
Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
TV set, turn off the camera and TV set.
Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Certain TV sets may not be able to display the captured movies.
Using HDMI CEC TV Sets
If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible
with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback
operations.
* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that
you can control them with one remote control unit.
Set [Ctrl over HDMI] to [Enable].
1
Under the [33] tab, select [Ctrl over
HDMI], then press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
Connect the camera to a TV set.
2
Use an HDMI cable to connect the
camera to the TV set.
X The TV set’s input will switch
automatically to the HDMI port
connected to the camera. If it does
not switch automatically, use the TV
set’s remote control to select the
HDMI IN port the cable is connected
to.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
352
Viewing Images on a TV Set
Press the camera’s <x> button.
3
X An image will appear on the TV
screen and you can use the TV set’s
remote control to play back images.
Select an image.
4
Point the remote control toward the
TV set and press the ꢀ/ꢁ button to
select an image.
Press the remote control’s Enter
Still photo playback menu
Movie playback menu
5 button.
X The menu appears and you can
perform the playback operations
shown on the left.
Press the remote control’s ꢀ/ꢁ
button to select the desired option,
then press the Enter button. For a
slide show, press the ꢂ/ꢃ button to
select an option, then press the Enter
button.
: Return
: 9-image index
: Play movie
: Slide show
: Display shooting info
: Rotate
If you select [Return] and press the
Enter button, the menu will disappear
and you can use the ꢀ/ꢁ button to
select an image.
is not possible. To use the TV’s remote control for playback, first press the
<X> button to return to the single-image display.
Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For
details, refer to the TV set’s instruction manual.
Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not
operate properly. In such a case, set [33: Ctrl over HDMI] to [Disable],
and use the camera to control the playback operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
353
a Copying Images
The images recorded on one card can be copied to another card.
3 Copying a Single Image
Select [Image copy].
Under the [31] tab, select [Image
1
copy], then press <0>.
Select [Sel.Image].
2
Check the copy source and target
cards’ number, and remaining
capacity.
Select [Sel.Image], then press <0>.
Lowest file number
Select the folder.
Select the folder containing the image
you want to copy, then press <0>.
Check the images displayed on the
right to select the desired folder.
X The images in the selected folder will
be displayed.
3
Number of images in folder
Folder name
Highest file number
The copy source is the card selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under
[51: Record func+card/folder sel.].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
354
a Copying Images
Select the images to be copied.
Total images selected
4
Turn the <5> dial to select an image
to be copied, then press <0>.
X The [X] icon will appear on the upper
left of the screen.
If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a three-
image display. To return to the single-
image display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
To select other images to be copied,
repeat step 4.
Press the <c> button.
After selecting all the images to be
copied, press the <c> button.
5
Select [OK].
Check the card where the images will
be copied to, then select [OK].
6
Select the target folder.
7
Select the target folder to which you
want to copy the images, then press
<0>.
To create a new folder, select [Create
folder].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
355
a Copying Images
Select [OK].
8
Check the information of the source
card and target card, then select
[OK].
X The copying will start and the
progress will be displayed.
When the copying is completed, the
result will be displayed. Select [OK] to
return to the screen in step 2.
3 Copying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can copy all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
Under [x1: Image copy], when you
select [Sel.n] or [All image], you can
copy all the images in the folder or on a
card.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
356
a Copying Images
The file name of the copied image will be the same as the source
image’s file name.
If [Sel.Image] is set, you cannot copy images in multiple folders at once.
Select images in each folder to copy them folder by folder.
If an image is being copied to a target folder/card which has an image
with the same file number, the following will be displayed: [Skip image
and continue] [Replace existing image] [Cancel copy]. Select the
copying method, then press <0>.
• [Skip image and continue]: Any images in the source folder having
the same file number as images in the target folder will be skipped and
not copied.
• [Replace existing image]: Any images in the target folder having the
same file number as the source images (including protected images)
will be overwritten.
the print order again.
The image’s print order information, image transfer information, and
photo book order information will not be retained when the image is
copied.
Shooting is not possible during the copying operation. Select [Cancel]
before shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
357
L Erasing Images
You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you
no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important
images from being erased accidentally, protect them. Erasing a
RAW+JPEG image will erase both the RAW and JPEG images.
Erasing a Single Image
Play back the image to be erased.
1
Press the <L> button.
2
X The Erase menu will appear.
Erase the image.
Select [Erase], then press <0>. The
3
image displayed will be erased.
Setting [83: Default Erase option] to [[Erase] selected] makes it faster to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
358
L Erasing Images
3 Checkmarking [X] Images to Be Erased in a Batch
By appending checkmarks <X> to the images to be erased, you can
erase multiple images at once.
Select [Erase images].
1
Under the [31] tab, select [Erase
images], then press <0>.
Select [Select and erase images].
X An image will be displayed.
2
If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a three-
image display. To return to the single-
image display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
Select the images to be erased.
3
Turn the <5
> dial to select the image
>.
to be erased, then press <
0
X A checkmark [X] will be displayed on
the upper left of the screen.
To select other images to be erased,
repeat step 3.
Erase the image.
Press the <L> button, then press
4
[OK].
X The selected images will be erased in
one batch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
359
L Erasing Images
3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When
[31: Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on
card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.
The images on the card selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under
[51: Record func+card/folder sel.] will be erased.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
360
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness
The LCD monitor’s brightness is adjusted automatically for optimum
viewing depending on the ambient light level. You can also set the
automatic adjustment’s brightness level (brighter or darker), or adjust
the brightness manually.
Select [LCD brightness].
1
Under the [52] tab, select [LCD
brightness], then press <0>.
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
2
Turn the <6> dial to make the
selection.
Adjust the brightness.
3
While referring to the gray chart, turn
the <5> dial, then press <0>.
You can adjust [Auto] to one of three
levels, and [Manual] to one of seven
levels.
Automatic adjustment
Manual adjustment
While [Auto] is set, be careful not to obstruct the round, ambient light sensor
To check the image’s exposure, looking at the histogram is
recommended (p.326).
During playback, pressing the <U> button will display the screen in step 2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
361
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images
Vertical images are rotated automatically so they
are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD
monitor and on the computer instead of
horizontally. You can change the setting for this
feature.
Select [Auto rotate].
1
Under the [51] tab, select [Auto
rotate], then press <0>.
Set the auto rotation.
2
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
OnzD
The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both
the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.
OnD
The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the computer.
Off
The vertical image is not automatically rotated.
Auto rotation will not work with vertical images captured while auto rotation
was [Off]. They will not rotate even if you later switch it to [On] for playback.
The vertical image will not be automatically rotated for the image review
just after shooting.
If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the
image may not be rotated automatically for playback.
If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the computer screen,
it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image. Using
the EOS software is recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
362
10
Post-Processing
Images
You can process RAW images and resize or crop JPEG
images.
A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in the following modes: <d>
<s> <f> <a> <F>.
The camera may not be able to process images taken with
another camera.
Post-processing images as described in this chapter cannot be
performed while the camera is connected to a computer via an
interface cable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
363
R
Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
You can process 1 images with the camera and save them as JPEG
images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can apply
different processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images
from it.
Note that 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the
camera. Use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.520) to
process those images.
Select [RAW image processing].
1
Under the [31] tab, select [RAW
image processing], then press
<0>.
X 1 images will be displayed.
Select an image.
2
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to process.
If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
Process the image.
3
Press <0> to make the RAW-
Use <9> to select an option, then
turn the <5> dial to switch the
setting.
X The displayed image will reflect such
settings as “Brightness adjustment”,
“White balance”, etc.
To return to the image settings at the
time of shooting, press the <B>
button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
364
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Displaying the setting screen
Press <0> to display the setting
screen. Turn the <5> or <6> dial
to change the setting. Press <0> to
finalize the setting and return to the
previous screen.
Save the image.
4
Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.
Select [OK] to save the image.
Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
To process another image, repeat
steps 2 to 4.
Magnified View
You can magnify the image by pressing the <u> button in step 3. The
magnification will differ depending on the pixel count of [Image quality]
set in [RAW image processing]. With <9>, you can scroll around the
magnified image.
To cancel magnified view, press the <u> button again.
Crop/Aspect Ratio
Frame lines indicating the shooting area will be displayed on images
than [Full-frame]. JPEG images generated from RAW images will be
saved with the cropping area or aspect ratio that was set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
365
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
RAW Image Processing Options
Brightness adjustment
You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop
increments. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.
You can select the white balance. If you select [Q] and press the
<B> button, you can select [Auto: Ambience priority] or [Auto:
White priority]. If you select [P] and press the <B> button,
you can set the color temperature. The displayed image will reflect
the setting’s effect.
You can select the Picture Style. By pressing the <B> button,
you can adjust the sharpness and other parameters. The displayed
image will reflect the setting’s effect.
You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer. The displayed image will
reflect the setting’s effect.
You can set the noise reduction for high ISO speeds. The displayed
image will reflect the setting’s effect. If the effect is difficult to discern,
magnify the image (p.365).
Image quality (p.149)
You can set the image quality when generating an image in JPEG
format.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
366
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Color space (p.193)
You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera’s LCD
monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the image will not look
very different when either color space is set.
If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect
corners. The peripheral illumination correction applied with the
camera will be less pronounced than with Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software) and may be less apparent. In such a case, use
Digital Photo Professional to apply the peripheral illumination
correction.
Distortion correction
Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If
[Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. The image
periphery will be trimmed in the corrected image.
Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, adjust the
sharpness with the Picture Style’s [Sharpness] parameter setting as
necessary.
Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject’s outline) due
to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the
corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern,
magnify the image (p.365).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
367
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Peripheral Illumination Correction, Distortion Correction, and
Chromatic Aberration Correction
To execute peripheral illumination correction, distortion correction, and
chromatic aberration correction, the correction data of the lens used is
necessary. If you cannot apply correction when processing RAW images in
data to the camera.
Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce the same results
as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional.
When processing images with [Distortion] set to [Enable], AF point
appended to the image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
368
S Resizing JPEG Images
You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it
as a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3/K/
5/a/b images. JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized.
Select [Resize].
Under the [32] tab, select [Resize],
1
then press <0>.
X An image will be displayed.
Select an image.
2
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to resize.
If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
Select the desired image size.
3
Press <0> to display the image
sizes.
Select the desired image size, then
press <0>.
Target sizes
Save the image.
4
Select [OK] to save the resized
image.
Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
To resize another image, repeat steps
2 to 4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
369
S Resizing JPEG Images
Resize Options by Original Image Size
Available Resize Settings
Original Image Size
K
5
k
a
k
k
k
b
k
k
k
k
c
k
k
k
k
k
3
K
5
a
k
k
b
Image Sizes
Sizes for resized images are shown below.
(Approx.)
Image Quality
Full-frame (3:2)
1.3x (crop)
1.6x (crop)
7680x5120
(39.3 megapixels)
6016x4000*
(24.1 megapixels)
4800x3200
(15.4 megapixels)
K
5760x3840
(22.1 megapixels)
4320x2880
(12.4 megapixels)
4512x3008
(13.6 megapixels)
3376x2256*
(7.6 megapixels)
3616x2408*
(8.7 megapixels)
2704x1808*
(4.9 megapixels)
5
a
1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)
720x480
(350,000 pixels)
1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)
720x480
(350,000 pixels)
1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)
720x480
(350,000 pixels)
b
c
Image Quality 1:1 (aspect ratio)
4:3 (aspect ratio) 16:9 (aspect ratio)
5120x5120
(26.2 megapixels)
6816x5120*
(34.9 megapixels)
7680x4320
(33.2 megapixels)
K
3840x3840
(14.7 megapixels)
5120x3840
(19.7 megapixels)
5760x3240
(18.7 megapixels)
5
2880x2880
(8.3 megapixels)
3840x2880
(11.1 megapixels)
4320x2432*
(10.5 megapixels)
a
1280x1280
(1.6 megapixels)
1712x1280*
(2.2 megapixels)
1920x1080
(2.1 megapixels)
b
480x480
(230,000 pixels)
640x480
(310,000 pixels)
720x408*
(290,000 pixels)
c
The items marked with an asterisk do not exactly match the indicated aspect
ratio. The image will be cropped slightly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
370
N Cropping JPEG Images
You can crop a JPEG image and save it as another image. You can
crop 3, K, 5, a and b JPEG images. JPEG c and RAW images
cannot be cropped.
Select [Cropping].
1
Under the [x2] tab, select
[Cropping], then press <0>.
X An image is displayed.
Select an image.
2
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to crop.
If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
Set the cropping frame size,
3 aspect ratio, position, and
orientation.
Press <0> to display the cropping
frame.
The image area within the cropping
frame will be cropped.
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
Turn the <6> dial to change the cropping frame size. The smaller
the cropping frame, the more magnified the cropped image will look.
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Turn the <5> dial to change the cropping frame’s aspect ratio. You
can select the aspect ratio as follows: [3:2], [16:9], [4:3], or [1:1].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
371
N Cropping JPEG Images
Moving the Cropping Frame
Use <9> to move the frame over the image vertically or
horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired
image area.
Switching the Cropping Frame Orientation
Pressing the <B> button will toggle the cropping frame between
the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you to create a
vertically oriented image from a horizontal image.
Check the image area to be
4 cropped.
Press the <Q> button.
X The image area to be cropped will be
displayed.
Press the <Q> button again to return
to the original image.
Save the cropped image.
5
Press <0> and select [OK] to save
the cropped image.
Check the destination folder and
image number, then select [OK].
To crop another image, repeat steps 2
to 4.
Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized.
not be appended to the cropped images.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
372
11
Sensor Cleaning
The camera has a Self Cleaning Sensor Unit to
automatically shake off dust adhered to the image
sensor’s front layer (low pass filter).
The Dust Delete Data can also be appended to the
image so that the dust spots remaining can be deleted
automatically by Digital Photo Professional (EOS
Smudges adhering to the front of the sensor
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases,
lubricant from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of
the sensor. If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor
cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
Even while the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit is operating, you can
press the shutter button halfway to interrupt the cleaning and start
shooting immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
373
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self
Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on
the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this
operation. However, you can choose to perform sensor cleaning
manually, or disable it.
Cleaning the Sensor Now
Select [Sensor cleaning].
1
Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
Select [Clean nowf].
2
Select [Clean nowf], then press
<0>.
Select [OK].
X The screen will indicate that the
sensor is being cleaned. (A small
sound may be heard.) Although there
will be a shutter sound, no picture is
taken.
For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed
upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.
Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.
Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]
option remains disabled temporarily.
Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning
In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].
X The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the
power switch to <1> or <2>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
374
3
Appending Dust Delete DataN
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust
that may be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust
still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for
erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital
automatically.
Preparation
Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to
infinity (∞). If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to
face towards you and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.
Obtaining the Dust Delete Data
Select [Dust Delete Data].
1
Under the [z3] tab, select [Dust
Delete Data], then press <0>.
Select [OK].
X After the automatic self-cleaning of
2
the sensor is performed, a message
will appear. Although there will be a
shutter sound during the cleaning, no
picture is taken.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
375
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
Shoot a solid-white object.
3
At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.
- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a
patternless, solid-white object and
take a picture.
X
The picture will be taken in aperture-
priority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.
Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there
is no card in the camera.
X When the picture is taken, the camera
will start collecting the Dust Delete
Data. When the Dust Delete Data is
obtained, a message will appear.
If the data is not obtained successfully,
an error message will appear. Follow
the “Preparation” procedure on the
preceding page, then select [OK]. Take
the picture again.
Dust Delete Data
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG
and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is
recommended that you update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it
again.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software,
p.520) to erase dust spots, refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual (p.522).
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly
affects the image file size.
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the
object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the EOS software.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
376
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can
be removed manually with a commercially-available blower, etc. Before
cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.
The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be
cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
Select [Sensor cleaning].
1
Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
Select [Clean manually].
2
Select [OK].
X In a moment, the reflex mirror will lock
3
up and the shutter will open.
“CLn” will blink on the LCD panel.
Clean the sensor.
4
End the cleaning.
5
Set the power switch to <2>.
If you use a battery, make sure it is fully charged.
If you use Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately) with AA/R6 batteries,
manual sensor cleaning will not be possible.
For the power source, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately) is
recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
377
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the
power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and
image sensor may get damaged.
• Setting the power switch to <2>.
• Removing or inserting the battery.
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor
with care.
Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the
sensor.
Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If
the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or
reflex mirror may get damaged.
Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force
can damage the sensor, or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor and
scratch it.
If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor, the beeper
will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
378
12
Printing Images and Transferring
Images to a Computer
You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print
out the images on the card. The camera is compliant with
“wPictBridge”, which is the standard for direct printing.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print
images recorded on the card according to your printing
instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,
etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or create a
print order for a photofinisher.
You can connect the camera to a computer and operate the
camera to transfer images recorded on the card to the
computer.
You can specify images on the card for printing in a
photobook.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
379
Preparing to Print
The direct printing procedure can be performed entirely with the
camera while you look at the camera’s LCD monitor.
Connecting the Camera to a Printer
Set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
1
2
Set up the printer.
For details, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
Connect the camera to a printer.
3
Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
When connecting the cable to the
camera, use the cable protector
(p.36). Connect the cable to the
digital terminal with the plug’s
<
> icon facing the back of the
camera.
To connect to the printer, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
Turn on the printer.
4
Set the camera’s power switch to
5 <1>.
X Some printers may make a beeping
sound.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
380
Preparing to Print
Play back the image.
Press the <x> button.
X The image will appear with the <w>
icon on the upper left of the screen to
indicate that the camera is connected
to a printer.
6
Make sure the printer has a PictBridge connection port.
Movies cannot be printed.
The camera cannot be used with printers conforming only to CP Direct or
Bubble Jet Direct.
If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the
printer. Resolve the problem displayed in the error message (p.388).
Printing is not possible if Multi Shot Noise Reduction or the HDR Mode is
set.
You can also print RAW images taken with this camera.
You can also print JPEG/RAW images shot when [z4: Crop/aspect
If you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
With a fully-charged battery, printing up to approx. 3 hr. is possible.
Before disconnecting the cable, first turn off the camera and printer. Hold
the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.
For direct printing, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately) to
power the camera is recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
381
w Printing
The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the
printer. Some settings may not be available. For details, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
Printer-connected icon
Select the image to be printed.
Check that the <w> icon is
1
displayed on the upper left of the LCD
monitor.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be printed.
Press <0>.
X The print setting screen will appear.
2
Print setting screen
Sets printing effects (p.384).
Sets date or file number imprinting to on or off
(p.385).
Sets quantity to be printed (p.385).
Sets print area (p.387).
Sets paper size, type, and layout (p.383).
Returns to the screen in step 1.
Starts printing.
The paper size, type, and layout you set are displayed.
* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file
number imprinting and cropping may not be selectable.
Select [Paper settings].
3
X The paper settings screen will
appear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
382
w Printing
Q Setting the Paper Size
Select the size of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
X The paper type screen will appear.
Y Setting the Paper Type
Select the type of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
X The page layout screen will appear.
U Setting the Page Layout
Select the page layout, then press
<0>.
X The print setting screen will reappear.
Prints with no borders. If your printer cannot print borderless
prints, the print will have borders.
Borderless
Bordered
Prints with white borders along the edges.
1
Imprints the shooting information* on the border on 9x13 cm or
larger prints.
Borderedc
xx-up
Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.
Prints 20 or 35 images as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size
20-upc
35-upp
2
paper* .
1
• Imprints the shooting information* with [20-upc].
The page layout varies depending on the printer model or its
settings.
Default
*1:From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter speed,
aperture, exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance, etc., will be
imprinted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
383
w Printing
Set the printing effects.
4
Set them if necessary. If you do not need
to set any printing effects, go to step 5.
Contents displayed on the screen
differ depending on the printer.
Select the setting, then press <0>.
Select the desired printing effect, then
press <0>.
If the <ze> icons are displayed
brightly, you can also adjust the
printing effects (p.386).
Printing Effect
Description
EOff
No automatic correction is applied.
Print with the printer’s standard colors. The image’s Exif data is
used to make automatic corrections.
EOn
Print with higher saturation to produce more vivid blues and
greens.
EVIVID
Image noise is reduced before printing.
ENR
Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.
0 B/W
0 Cool tone
Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.
Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.
Warm tone
0
Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No automatic
color adjustments are applied.
zNatural
zNatural M
EDefault
Printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural” setting.
However, this setting enables finer printing adjustments than
with “Natural.”
Printing differs depending on the printer. For details, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
* When you change the printing effects, changes are reflected in the image
displayed on the upper left of the screen. Note that the printed image may look
slightly different from the displayed image, which is only an approximation. This
also applies to [Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on page 386.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
384
w Printing
Set the date and file number
5 imprinting.
Set them if necessary.
Select <I>, then press <0>.
Set the print settings as desired, then
press <0>.
Set the number of copies.
Set it if necessary.
Select <R>, then press <0>.
Select the number of copies, then
press <0>.
6
Start printing.
Select [Print], then press <0>.
7
The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the
printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer
to the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings
are.
Depending on the image’s file size and image-recording quality, it may
take some time for the printing to start after you select [Print].
image.
To stop the printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select
[OK].
will revert to their defaults.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
385
w Printing
e Adjusting Printing Effects
effect. When the <ze> icons are
displayed brightly, you can press the
<B> button. You can then adjust the
printing effects. What can be adjusted or
what is displayed will depend on the
selection made in step 4.
Brightness
The image brightness can be adjusted.
Adjust levels
When you select [Manual], you can change
the histogram’s distribution and adjust the
image’s brightness and contrast.
With the Adjust levels screen displayed, press
the <B> button to change the position of
the <h>. Turn the <5> dial to freely adjust
the shadow level (0 - 127) or highlight level (128 - 255).
kBrightener
Effective in backlit conditions where the subject’s face looks dark.
When [On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.
Red-eye corr.
Effective in flash images where the subject has red eyes. When [On]
is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.
The [kBrightener] and [Red-eye corr.] effects will not be reflected on
the screen.
When [Detail set.] is selected, you can adjust the [Contrast],
[Saturation], [Color tone], and [Color balance]. To adjust the [Color
balance], use <9>. B is for blue, A for amber, M for magenta, and G for
green. The image’s color balance will be adjusted towards the color in
the direction of the move.
If you select [Clear all], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to
their defaults.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
386
w Printing
Cropping the Image
You can crop the image and print only an
enlarged version of the cropped portion,
as if the image is recomposed.
Tilt correction
Set the cropping right before printing.
If you change the print settings after
setting the cropping, you may have to set
the cropping again before printing.
1 On the print setting screen, select [Cropping].
2 Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.
The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The
cropping frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with [Paper settings].
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
Turn the <6> dial to change the cropping frame size. The
smaller the cropping frame, the larger the image magnification will
be for printing.
Moving the Cropping Frame
Use <9> to move the frame over the image vertically or
horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired
image area.
Switching the Orientations of the Cropping Frame
Pressing the <B> button will toggle the cropping frame
between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you
to create a vertically oriented print from a horizontal image.
Image Tilt Correction
By turning the <5> dial, you can tilt the image between -10 and
+10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the
image tilt, the <O> icon on the screen will turn blue.
3 Press <0> to exit the cropping.
X The print setting screen will reappear.
You can check the cropped image area on the print setting screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
387
w Printing
Depending on the printer, you may not be able to print an image with a
If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect
ratio, the image may be cropped significantly when you print it as a
borderless print. If the image is cropped, the print may look grainier due
to the fewer number of pixels.
If you imprint shooting information on an image shot at an expanded ISO
speed (H), the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted.
Depending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as
you specified.
The smaller you make the cropping frame, the grainier the picture will
look in the print.
Check the camera’s LCD monitor while cropping the image. If you look at
the image on a TV screen, the cropping frame may not be displayed
accurately.
Handling Printer Errors
If printing does not resume after you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper,
etc.) and select [Continue], operate the buttons on the printer to resume
printing. For details on resuming the printing, refer to the printer’s instruction
manual.
Error Messages
If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the
camera’s LCD monitor. Press <0> to stop printing. After fixing the
problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem, refer
to the printer’s instruction manual.
Paper Error
Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer.
Ink Error
Check the printer’s ink level and the waste ink tank.
Hardware Error
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.
File Error
The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge. Images taken with a
different camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
388
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, file
number imprinting, etc. The print settings will be applied to all print-
ordered images. (They cannot be set individually for each image.)
Setting the Printing Options
Select [Print order].
1
Under the [31] tab, select [Print
order], then press <0>.
Select [Set up].
2
Set the options as desired.
3
Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
Select the option to be set, then press
<0>. Select the desired setting,
then press <0>.
Print type
Date
File No.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
389
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Standard
Prints one image on one sheet.
K
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on
one sheet.
Index
L
Print type
K
Both
L
Prints both the standard and index prints.
On
Date
[On] imprints the recorded date on the print.
[On] imprints the file number on the print.
Off
On
Off
File number
Exit the setting.
4
Press the <M> button.
X The print order screen will reappear.
Next, select [Sel.Image], [Byn], or
[All image] to order the images to be
printed.
RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered. You can print RAW
If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both]
Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may
not be imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer model.
With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]
at the same time.
When printing with DPOF, use the card whose print order specifications
are set. It cannot be printed with the specified print order if you just
extract images from the card and try to print them.
Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers may not be able to
print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction
manual before printing, or check with your photofinisher about
compatibility when ordering prints.
Do not specify a new print order for a card containing images whose print
order was set by a different camera. The print order may be overwritten.
Also, the print order may not be possible, depending on the image type.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
390
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Print Ordering
Sel.Image
Select and order images one by one.
If you press the <u> button and turn the
<6> dial counterclockwise, you can
select an image from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, turn the <6> dial clockwise.
Press the <M> button to save the
print order to the card.
Standard / Both
Press <0>, and a print order for one
copy of the displayed image will be
placed. By turning the <5> dial, you
can set the number of copies to be
printed up to 99.
Quantity
Total images selected
Index
Press <0> to add a checkmark to the
box [X]. The image will be included in
the index print.
Checkmark
Index icon
Byn
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one
copy of all the images in the folder will be specified. If you select
[Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for all the
images in the folder will be canceled.
All image
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the
card will be set for printing. If you select [Clear all on card], the print
order will be cleared for all the images on the card.
Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order
even if you set [Byn] or [All image].
When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one
print order. If you specify more than this, all the images may not be printed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
391
W
Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images
With a PictBridge printer, you can easily
print images with DPOF.
1 Prepare to print.
Follow the “Connecting the Camera to a Printer” procedure up to
step 5.
2 Under the [31] tab, select [Print order].
3 Select [Print].
[Print] will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a
printer and printing is possible.
5 Select [OK].
Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.
Certain printers may not imprint the file number.
If [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.
Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a
bright background or on the border.
Under [Adjust levels], [Manual] cannot be selected.
If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing of the remaining
images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not resume if any of the
following are the case:
• You changed the print order or deleted any of the print ordered images
before resuming the printing.
• When index is set, you changed the paper setting before resuming the
printing.
• The card’s remaining capacity was low when you paused the printing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
392
d Transferring Images to a Computer
You can connect the camera to a computer and operate the camera to
transfer images on the card to the computer. This is called direct image
transfer.
The direct image transfer can be performed with the camera while
you look at the LCD monitor.
The images transferred to the computer will be saved in the [Pictures]
or [My Pictures] folder and organized in folders by shooting date.
Caution for Image Transfer
Before connecting the camera to a computer, install the EOS Utility
Preparing Image Transfer
Set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
1
Connect the camera to a
2 computer.
Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
When connecting the cable to the
camera, use the cable protector
(p.36). Connect the cable to the
digital terminal with the plug’s
<
> icon facing the back of the
camera.
Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
393
d Transferring Images to a Computer
Set the camera’s power switch to
3 <1>.
When the computer displays a screen
to select the program, select [EOS
Utility].
X The EOS Utility screen will appear on
the computer.
After the EOS Utility screen appears, do not operate EOS Utility. If any
screen other than EOS Utility’s main window is displayed, [Direct transfer]
not be available.)
If the EOS Utility screen does not appear, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual (p.522).
Before disconnecting the cable, turn off the camera. Hold the plug (not
the cord) to pull out the cable.
3 Transferring RAW+JPEG Images
For RAW+JPEG images, you can specify
which image to transfer.
On the next page in step 2, select
[RAW+JPEG transfer], and select the
image to be transferred: [JPEG only],
[RAW only], or [RAW+JPEG].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
394
d Transferring Images to a Computer
3 Selecting the Images to be Transferred
Sel.Image
Select [Image transfer].
Under the [32] tab, select [Image
transfer], then press <0>.
1
Select [Image sel./transfer].
2
3
Select [Sel.Image].
Select the images to be
4 transferred.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be transferred, then press
<0>.
Turn the <
the screen’s upper left, then press <
If you press the < > button and turn
the < > dial counterclockwise, you
5
> dial to display the [
X
0
] on
>.
u
6
can select an image from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, turn the <6> dial clockwise.
To select other images to be
transferred, repeat step 4.
When [Sel.Image] is selected, you can check the image’s transfer status
on the upper left of the screen: No mark: Not selected. X: Selected for
transfer. l: Transfer failed. k: Transfer succeeded.
4 can also be performed while the camera is not connected to a
computer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
395
d Transferring Images to a Computer
Transfer the image.
5
On the computer screen, check that
EOS Utility’s main window is displayed.
Select [Direct transfer], then press
<0>.
On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK], and the images will be
transferred to the computer.
Images selected with [Sel.n] and
[All image] can also be transferred in
this way.
Sel.n
Select [Sel.n] and select [Folder images not transfer’d]. When
you select a folder, all the images in that folder not yet transferred to
the computer will be selected.
Selecting [Folder images failed transf.] will select the selected
folder’s images that failed to transfer.
Selecting [Clear folder transf. history] will clear the transfer history
of the images in the selected folder. After clearing the transfer
history, you can select [Folder images not transfer’d] and again
transfer all the images in the folder.
All image
If [All image] is selected and you select [Card images not
transferred], all the images on the card not yet transferred to a
computer will be selected.
For a description of [Card images failed transfer] and [Clear
card’s transf. history], see “Sel.n” above.
If any screen other than EOS Utility’s main window is displayed on the
computer, [Direct transfer] is not displayed.
During the image transfer, certain menu options cannot be used.
You can also transfer movies.
Up to 9,999 images can be transferred in one batch.
Shooting is possible during the image transfer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
396
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When
you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to transfer images to a computer,
the specified images will be copied to a dedicated folder. This function
is useful for ordering photobooks online.
Specifying One Image at a Time
Select [Photobook Set-up].
1
Under the [x1] tab, select
[Photobook set-up], then press
<0>.
Select [Select images].
2
Select the image to be specified.
3
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be specified, then press
<0>.
If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a three-
image display. To return to the single-
image display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
To select other images to be
transferred, repeat step 3. The
number of specified images will be
displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
397
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When [x1: Photobook Set-up] is set
to [All images in folder] or [All images
on card], all the images in the folder or
on the card will be specified.
To clear your selections, select [Clear all
in folder] or [Clear all on card].
RAW images and movies cannot be specified.
Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another
camera for another photobook with this camera. The photobook settings
may be overwritten.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
398
13
Customizing the
Camera
You can customize various camera functions to suit
your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions.
Also, current camera settings can be saved under <w>
<x> <y> positions of the Mode Dial.
The features explained in this chapter can be set and
used in the following shooting modes: <d> <s>
<f> <a> <F>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
399
3 Custom FunctionsN
k
Shooting
Movie
A LV
Shooting
81: Exposure
Exposure level increments
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
p.402
ISO speed setting increments
Bracketing auto cancel
Bracketing sequence
In a
(Stillphoto,
with WB
p.403
bracketing)
Number of bracketed shots
Safety shift
p.404
p.405
p.406
Same exposure for new aperture
82: Exposure
Set shutter speed range
k
k
k
k
p.408
Set aperture range
The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV)
shooting or movie shooting. (Settings are ineffective.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
400
3 Custom FunctionsN
k
Shooting
Movie
A LV
Shooting
83: Others
p.409
p.410
Warnings z in viewfinder
Dial direction during Tv/Av
Multi function lock
k
k
k
k
Depends on setting
k
Custom Controls
p.411
p.412
Add cropping information
Default Erase option
(During playback)
k
k
Retract lens on power off
84: Clear
Selecting [84: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] will clear all the
Custom Function settings.
Even if [84: Clear all Custom Func.(C.Fn)] is executed, the settings for
[83: Custom Controls] will remain unchanged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
401
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Under the [8] tab, you can customize
various camera features to suit your
picture-taking preferences. Any settings
different from the default will be
displayed in blue.
C.Fn1: Exposure
Exposure level increments
1/3:1/3-stop
1/2:1/2-stop
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is
effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine
increments than 1/3-stop.
When [1/2-stop] is set, the exposure level will be displayed as shown below.
ISO speed setting increments
1/3: 1/3-stop
1/1: 1-stop
You can change the manual ISO speed setting increments to 1-
stop.
Even if [1/1] is set, ISO speed will be automatically set in 1/3-stop
increments when Auto ISO is set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
402
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Bracketing auto cancel
ON: Enable
When you set the power switch to <
2
>, the AEB and white balance
bracketing settings will be canceled. AEB will also be canceled when
the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting.
OFF: Disable
The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be
canceled even if you set the power switch to <2>. (If the flash
is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting, AEB will be
canceled temporarily, but the AEB range will be retained.)
Bracketing sequence
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence
can be changed.
0-+: 0, -, +
-0+: -, 0, +
+0-: +, 0, -
White Balance Bracketing
AEB
B/A Direction
M/G Direction
0
-
: Standard
exposure
0 : Standard white balance 0 : Standard white balance
: Decreased
exposure
-
: Blue bias
- : Magenta bias
+ : Green bias
+ : Increased
exposure
+ : Amber bias
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
403
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Number of bracketed shots
The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can
be changed from the default, 3 shots, to 2, 5, or 7 shots.
When [Bracketing sequence: 0, -, +] is set, the bracketed shots will
be taken as shown in the table below.
3: 3 shots
2: 2 shots
5: 5 shots
7: 7 shots
(1-stop increments)
2nd
Shot
3rd
Shot
4th
Shot
5th
Shot
6th
Shot
7th
Shot
1st Shot
3: 3 shots Standard (0)
2: 2 shots Standard (0)
5: 5 shots Standard (0)
7: 7 shots Standard (0)
-1
±1
-2
-3
+1
-1
-2
+1
-1
+2
+1
+2
+3
If [2 shots] is set, you can select the + or - side when setting the AEB
range. Setting WB bracketing will result in a decreased exposure in the B/A
or M/G direction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
404
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Safety shift
OFF: Disable
Tv/Av: Shutter speed/Aperture
This takes effect in the shutter-priority AE (s) and aperture-
priority AE (f) modes. If the subject brightness changes and the
standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure
range, the camera will automatically change the manually-selected
setting to obtain a standard exposure.
ISO: ISO speed
This works in the Program AE (d), shutter-priority AE (s), and
aperture-priority AE (f) modes. If the subject brightness
changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the
autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the
manually set ISO speed to obtain a standard exposure.
Under [z2: ISO speed settings], even if [ISO speed range] or [Min.
shutter spd.] is changed from the default setting, safety shift will
override it if a standard exposure cannot be obtained.
The minimum and maximum ISO speeds of the safety shift using the ISO
However, if the manually set ISO speed exceeds the [Auto ISO range],
the safety shift will take effect up or down to the manually set ISO speed.
Safety shift will take effect if necessary even when flash is used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
405
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Same exposure for new aperture
If the <a> mode (manual exposure shooting) is set and the ISO
speed is set manually (other than Auto ISO or H (12800) is set), the
maximum aperture’s f/number may change to a higher number
(smaller aperture) if you do any of the following: 1. Change the lens, 2.
Attach or detach an Extender, or 3. Use a zoom lens whose maximum
aperture f/number changes. If you then shoot at the exposure setting
as is, the image will be underexposed by the amount the maximum
aperture f/number changes to a higher number. However, by changing
the ISO speed or shutter speed (Tv) automatically, you can obtain the
same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3.
OFF: Disable
Automatic changes in settings to maintain the specified exposure
will not be applied. The ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture
already set will be used for shooting. If you do 1, 2, or 3 and the
maximum aperture f/number increases, adjust the ISO speed and
shutter speed before you shoot.
ISO: ISO speed
If you do 1, 2, or 3, the ISO speed will automatically increase to
compensate for the amount that the maximum aperture f/number
increases by. The same exposure that would be obtained before
you did 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained.
Tv: Shutter speed
If you do 1, 2, or 3, a slower shutter speed will automatically be set
to compensate for the amount that the maximum aperture
f/number increases by. The same exposure that would be obtained
before you did 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
406
3 Custom Function SettingsN
This function does not work with macro lenses whose actual aperture
f/number changes when the magnification changes.
This function does not work with movies.
If [ISO speed] is set and the exposure cannot be maintained within the
range set with [ISO speed range], the ISO speed will be automatically
switched within the specified range.
If [Shutter speed] is set and the exposure cannot be maintained within
the range set with [82: Set shutter speed range], the shutter speed
will be automatically switched within the specified range.
If you do 1, 2, or 3 and the camera turns off (power switch is set to
<2>, etc.) while the exposure is being maintained, the standard
exposure will be updated to the exposure at the moment the camera
turns off.
This function also works with changes in the highest f/number (minimum
aperture).
If you set [ISO speed] or [Shutter speed], do 1, 2, or 3, and then undo 1,
2, or 3 without manually changing the ISO speed, shutter speed, or
aperture, so that the camera is back to its original state, the original
exposure setting will be restored.
If [ISO speed] is set and the ISO speed increases to an expanded ISO
speed, the shutter speed may change to maintain the exposure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
407
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn2: Exposure
Set shutter speed range
You can set the shutter speed range. In the <s> <a> modes, you
can set the shutter speed manually within the shutter speed range that
you have set. In the <d> <f> modes, the shutter speed will be set
automatically within the shutter speed range that you have set.
Highest speed
You can set it from 1/8000 sec. to 15 sec.
Lowest speed
You can set it from 30 sec. to 1/4000 sec.
Set aperture range
You can set the aperture range. In the <f> <a> <F> modes, you
can set the aperture manually within the aperture range that you have
set. In the <d> <s> modes, the aperture will be set automatically
within the aperture range that you have set.
Min. aperture (Max. f/)
You can set it from f/91 to f/1.4.
Max. aperture (Min. f/)
You can set it from f/1.0 to f/64.
The settable aperture range will differ depending on the lens’s maximum
and minimum apertures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
408
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn3: Others
Warnings z in viewfinder
When any of the following functions are set, the <z> icon can be
displayed in the viewfinder (p.31).
Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear, and
press <0> to append a <X>. Then select [OK] to register the setting.
When monochrome V is set
icon will appear.
When WB is corrected
appear.
When one-touch image quality is set
If you change the image-recording quality with the one-touch
When M is set
If [z3: High ISO speed NR] is set to [Multi Shot Noise
When spot metering is set
warning icon will appear.
If you set any of the checkmarked [X] functions, <z> will also appear for
Custom Quick Control screen (p.427).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
409
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Dial direction during Tv/Av
: Normal
: Reverse direction
Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture
can be reversed.
In the <a> shooting mode, the turning direction of the <6> and
<5> dials will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the turning
direction of only the <6> dial will be reversed. The <5> dial’s
turning direction in the <a> mode and the turning direction to set
the exposure compensation in the <d>, <s>, and <f> mode
will be the same.
Multi function lock
When the <R> switch is set to the right, it can prevent the <6>,
<5>, and <9> from accidentally changing a setting.
Select the camera control you want to lock, then press <0> to
append a checkmark [X]. Select [OK] to register the setting.
6 Main Dial
5 Quick Control Dial
9 Multi-controller
If the <R> switch is set and you try to use any of the locked
camera controls, <L> will appear in the viewfinder and on the LCD
By default, when locked, the <5> dial will be locked.
Even if the <5> dial is appended with a [X] checkmark, you can still
use the touch pad <h>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
410
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Custom Controls
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials
Add cropping information
If you set cropping information, vertical lines for the aspect ratio you
have set will appear on the Live View image. You can then compose
the shot as if you were shooting with a medium- or large-format
camera (6x6 cm, 4x5 inch, etc.).
When you take a picture, the aspect ratio information for cropping the
image with the EOS software will be appended to the image. (The
image is recorded to the card without being cropped.)
After the image is transferred to a computer, you can use Digital Photo
aspect ratio that was set.
OFF : Off
6:7 : Aspect ratio 6:7
5:6 : Aspect ratio 10:12
5:7 : Aspect ratio 5:7
6:6 : Aspect ratio 6:6
3:4 : Aspect ratio 3:4
4:5 : Aspect ratio 4:5
If [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] is set to any setting other than [Full-frame],
the cropping information cannot be set.
Cropping information will also be appended for viewfinder shooting.
However, the cropping range will not be displayed.
Even if a RAW image with cropping information added is processed with
image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
411
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Default Erase option
During image playback and image review after image capture, when
set which option, [Cancel] or [Erase], is to be preselected on this
screen.
If [Erase] is set, you can just press <0> to quickly erase the image.
: [Cancel] selected
L : [Erase] selected
If [Erase] is set, be careful not to erase an image accidentally.
Retract lens on power off
This is to set the lens retraction mechanism for when a gear-driven
STM lens (such as EF40mm f/2.8 STM) is attached to the camera. You
can set it to retract the extended lens automatically when the camera’s
power switch is set to <2>.
ON: Enable
OFF: Disable
With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.
Make sure that the lens has been retracted before detaching it.
When [Enable] is set, this function takes effect regardless of the lens’s
focus mode switch setting (AF or MF).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
412
83: Custom ControlsN
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials
according to your preferences.
Select [83: Custom Controls].
1
Under the [83] tab, select [Custom
Controls], then press <0>.
X The Custom Controls screen to select
control buttons and dials will appear.
Select a camera button or dial.
2
Select a camera button or dial, then
press <0>.
X The name of the camera control and
the assignable functions will be
displayed.
Assign a function.
Select a function, then press <0>.
If the [z] icon appears on the
bottom left, you can press the
<B> button and set other related
options.
3
Exit the setting.
4
When you press <0> to exit the
setting, the screen in step 2 will
reappear.
Press the <M> button to exit.
With the screen in step 2 displayed, you can press the <L> button to revert
the Custom Control settings to their defaults. Note that the [83: Custom
Controls] settings will not be canceled even if you select [84: Clear all
Custom Func. (C.Fn)].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
413
83: Custom ControlsN
Assignable Functions to Camera Controls
Function
Page
Metering and AF start
AF stop
k
k*1
k*1
k
k
Switch to registered AF function
ONE SHOT z AI SERVO
Switch to registered AF point
AF point direct selection
Direct AF point selection: Vertical
Pause Movie Servo AF
Metering start
k
k
k
k
AE lock
k
k
AE lock (while button pressed)
AE lock (hold)
k
k
k
k
k
k
AE lock, AF stop
FE lock
Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
Set ISO speed ( during metering)
)
Exposure compensation (hold button,
turn
)
Shutter speed setting in M mode
Aperture setting in M mode
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
414
83: Custom ControlsN
Assignable Functions to Camera Controls
Function
Page
Switch between crop/aspect
One-touch image quality setting
One-touch image quality (hold)
Image quality
Picture Style
Depth-of-field preview
IS start
Menu display
Register/recall shooting function
Image playback
k*7
k*7
Magnify/Reduce (press SET, turn
)
Cycle: y • g/Drive • AF/WB • q
Unlock while button pressed
Flash function settings
No function (disabled)
k
k
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
416
83: Custom ControlsN
: Metering and AF start
When you press the button assigned to this function, metering and AF
are executed.
*1:When assigned to the <p> or <A> button,
pressing the <B> button while the setting
screen is displayed will enable you to set the
detailed AF settings. When shooting, pressing the
<p> or <A> button will execute AF as it was
set.
AF start position
When [Registered AF point] is set, you can press the <p> or
<A> button to switch to the registered AF point.
Registering the AF Point
1. Set the AF area selection mode to one of the following: Single-
point Spot AF (manual selection), Single-point AF (manual
selection), AF point expansion (manual selection ), AF point
expansion (manual selection, surrounding points), or 61-point
automatic selection AF. Zone AF (manual selection of zone)
cannot be selected.
2. Select an AF point manually.
3. Hold down the <S> button and press the <U> button. A beep
will sound and the AF point will be registered. If the AF area
selection mode is set to any setting other than 61-point automatic
selection AF, the registered AF point will blink.
When the AF point is registered, the following will be displayed:
• 61-point automatic selection AF:
HP (HP: Home Position)
• Spot AF, 1 pt AF, Expand AF Area: SEL (Center), SEL HP (Off
center)
To cancel the registered AF point, hold down the <S> button and press
the <m> button. The registered AF point will also be canceled if you
select [54: Clear all camera settings].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
418
83: Custom ControlsN
Press the <p> or <A> button to perform AF with the set case
from [Case1] to [Case6].
Press the <p> or <A> button to perform AF with the set AF
operation.
Press the <p> or <A> button to perform AF with the set AF
area selection mode.
If you want to keep using currently selected AF point when you press
the <p> or <A> button, set [AF start position] to [Manually
selected AF point]. If you want to keep the currently set AI Servo AF
characteristics, AF operation, and AF area selection mode, select
[Maintain current setting].
If [24: Orientation linked AF point] is set to [Separate AF pts:
Area+pt] or [Separate AF pts: Pt only], you can register the AF points
to be used separately for vertical (grip up or down) and horizontal
shooting.
If [AF start position: Registered AF point] and [AF area selection
mode] are both set, [Registered AF point] will take effect.
: AF stop
The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this
function. Convenient when you want to stop the AF during AI Servo AF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
419
83: Custom ControlsN
: Switch to registered AF function
After setting and assigning this function to a button, you can apply the
following settings by holding down the assigned button for AF: AF area
when you want to change the AF characteristics during AI Servo AF.
*2:On the setting screen, press the <B> button to
display the detailed settings screen. Turn the <5>
or <6> dial to select the parameter to be
registered, then press <0> to append a
checkmark [X]. When you select a parameter and
press <0>, you can adjust the parameter.
By pressing the <L> button, you can revert the
settings to their defaults.
: ONE SHOT z AI SERVO
You can switch the AF operation. In One-Shot AF mode, when you hold
down the button to which this function is assigned, the camera switches
to AI Servo AF mode. In the AI Servo AF mode, the camera switches to
One-Shot AF mode only while you hold down the button. Convenient
when you need to keep switching between One-Shot AF and AI Servo
AF for a subject that keeps moving and stopping.
: Switch to registered AF point
During metering, when you press the button assigned to this function,
focusing point can be switched to the registered AF point.
*3:On the setting screen, when you press the <B> button, you can select [Switch
only when btn is held] or [Switch each time btn is pressed]. To register the AF
point, see page 418.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
420
83: Custom ControlsN
: Direct AF point selection
During metering, you can select an AF point directly with the <9> dial
or <5> without pressing the <S> button. With the <5> dial, you can
select a left or right AF point. (Looping sequence for Zone AF.)
*5:On the Multi-controller setting screen, when you press the <B> button, you can
press the center of <9> to select [Switch to center AF point] or [Switch to
: Direct AF point selection: Vertical
During metering, you can turn the <5> dial to directly select an upper
or lower AF point without pressing the <S> button. (Looping sequence
for Zone AF.)
: Pause Movie Servo AF
During Movie Servo AF, you can pause the AF by pressing the Depth-
of-field preview button or <0>. Press the button again to resume
Movie Servo AF.
: Metering start
When you press the shutter button halfway, exposure metering is
performed (AF is not performed).
: AE lock
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock) during metering. Convenient when you want to
focus and meter the shot at different areas or when you want to take
multiple shots at the same exposure setting.
To change the aperture in <a> mode when [Direct AF point selection],
[Direct AF pt select: Vertical], or [Set ISO speed ( during metering)]
<A> button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
421
83: Custom ControlsN
: AE lock (while button pressed)
The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while you press the shutter
button.
: AE lock (hold)
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock). The AE lock will be maintained until you press the
button again. Convenient when you want to focus and meter the shot at
different areas or when you want to take multiple shots at the same
exposure setting.
: AE lock, AF stop
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock) and the AF will stop. Convenient during AI Servo AF
if you want AE lock at the same time when AF stops.
: FE lock
During flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function
will fire a preflash and record the required flash output (FE lock).
: Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
)
You can set the ISO speed by holding down <0> and turning the
<6> dial.
If this control is used while Auto ISO is set, manual ISO speed setting
will take effect. Auto ISO cannot be set. If you use this function in the
<a> mode, you can adjust the exposure with the ISO speed while
maintaining the current shutter speed and aperture.
: Set ISO speed ( during metering)
During metering, you can set the ISO speed by turning the <5> dial.
The settable range is the same as with
.
If you assign [AE lock (while button pressed)] to the shutter button, any
buttons assigned to [AE lock] or [AE lock (hold)] will also work as [AE lock
(while button pressed)].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
422
83: Custom ControlsN
: Exposure compensation (hold button, turn
)
You can set the exposure compensation by holding down <0> and
turning the <6> dial. Convenient when you want to set exposure
compensation while <a> manual exposure and Auto ISO are set.
: Shutter speed setting in M mode
In manual exposure <a>, you can set the shutter speed with the
<6> or <5> dial.
: Aperture setting in M mode
In manual exposure <a>, you can set the aperture with the <5> or
<6> dial.
: Switch between crop/aspect
When you press the <B> button, you can switch from full-frame
shooting to crop shooting (approx. 1.3x or 1.6x) or shooting with the set
aspect ratio (1:1, 4:3, or 16:9). Pressing the <B> button switches
the setting.
*5:On the setting screen, press the <B> button to
display the detailed settings screen. Turn the <5>
dial to select the setting to be switched to, then
press <0> to append a checkmark [X].
The operations for [Set ISO speed (hold btn, turn
comp (hold btn, turn )] are possible even when the <R> switch is
set to the right (Multi function lock, p.59).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
423
83: Custom ControlsN
: One-touch image quality setting
Pressing the button assigned to this function will switch to the image-
recording quality set here. While this change is in effect, the image-
recording quality (JPEG/RAW) will blink in the viewfinder (with [Show/
hide in viewfinder]’s [Image quality] checkmarked). After the shooting
ends, the One-touch image quality setting will be canceled and the
image-recording quality will be switched back to the previous quality.
*6:On the setting screen, by pressing the <B> button, you can select the image-
recording quality for this function.
: One-touch image quality (hold)
Pressing the button assigned to this function will switch to the image-
recording quality set here. While this change is in effect, the image-
recording quality (JPEG/RAW) will blink in the viewfinder (with [Show/
hide in viewfinder]’s [Image quality] checkmarked). Even after
shooting, the One-touch image quality setting will not be canceled. To
revert to the previous image-recording quality setting, press the button
assigned to this function again.
*6:You can select the image-recording quality for this function by pressing the <B>
button in the setting screen.
: Image quality
Press <0> to display the image-recording quality setting screen
If RAW or RAW+JPEG is set for the image-recording quality to be switched
to with [One-touch image quality setting] and [One-touch image quality
For [z3: High ISO speed noise reduct’n], [Standard] will be applied for
shooting.
When the image-recording quality is switched with the One-touch image
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
424
83: Custom ControlsN
: Picture Style
Press <0> to display the Picture Style selection setting screen on the
LCD monitor (p.164).
: Depth-of-field preview
When you press the depth-of-field preview button, the aperture will stop
: IS start
If you press the button assigned to this function when the lens’s IS
: Menu display
Press <0> to display the menu on the LCD monitor.
: Register/recall shooting function
You can manually set the main shooting functions such as the shutter
speed, aperture, ISO speed, metering mode and AF area selection
mode, and register them to the camera. Only while you hold down the
button assigned to this function, you can recall and use the registered
shooting function settings and shoot.
*7:On the setting screen, press the <B> button to
display the detailed settings. Turn the <5> or
<6> dial to select the function to be registered,
then press <0> to append a checkmark [X] to it.
When you select a function and press <0>, you
can adjust the setting. By pressing the <L> button,
you can revert the settings to their defaults.
By selecting [Register current settings], the
camera’s current settings will be registered. To
register the AF point, see page 418.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
425
83: Custom ControlsN
: Image playback
Pressing <0> will play back images.
: Magnify/Reduce (press SET, turn
)
Press <0> to magnify or reduce the images recorded on the card. See
275).
: Cycle: y • g/Drive • AF/WB • q
Pressing the <B> button changes the settable function in this
sequence: y•g9R•f9B•q.
: Unlock while button pressed
Even when the <R> switch is set to the right, only while you hold
down the depth-of-field preview button, you can use the camera control
buttons and dials restricted by [83: Multi function lock].
: Flash function settings
Pressing <0> will display the flash function setting screen.
: No function (disabled)
Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the
button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
426
Custom Quick Control
functions are displayed in the default layout. On the Custom Quick
Control screen, you can customize the screen with your preferred
shooting functions and layout. This feature is called “Custom Quick
Control”.
This page explains how to change the layout of the Custom Quick
Select [Custom Quick Control].
1
Under the [53] tab, select [Custom
Quick Control], then press <0>.
Select [Start editing layout].
2
Read the operation procedure
3 and select [OK].
• Q : Add item
• L : Remove
• s : Select and confirm
Items displayed on the default screen
are shown on the left.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
427
Custom Quick Control
Add an item.
Press the <Q> button.
Turn the <5> dial or use <9> to
select the item to be added, then
press <0>.
To remove an item, select the item,
then press the <L> button.
4
5
Otherwise, select [Clear all items] in
step 2.
For items that let you select the icon
size, turn the <5> dial or use <9>
to select the size, then press <0>.
For items which can be positioned
and for display sizes, see page 430.
Position the item.
Use <6>, <5> or <9> to move
the item (framed with directional
wedges) to the desired position.
If you want to change the size, press
the <B> button to change it.
Press <0> to place the item. If there
is already an item on that position, it
will be overwritten (deleted).
To move an item to another position,
select the item and press <0> to
move it.
If you first want to delete all the items displayed by default, select [Clear all
items] in step 2 and then go to step 4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
428
Custom Quick Control
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to position
Sample layout
other items as desired.
To delete an item already in position,
select it and press the <L> button.
Exit the setting.
6
7
Press the <M> button to exit the
setting. The screen in step 2 will
reappear.
Check the setting screen.
Sample screen
Under [53: z button display
options], check that [Custom Quick
Control screen] is checkmarked
Press the <B> button to display
the Custom Quick Control screen
(p.442) and check the layout.
Press the <Q> button to use the
Resetting the Custom Quick Control Screen or
Clearing All Items
In step 2, selecting [Revert layout to default] will revert the Custom
Quick Control screen to the default layout of Custom Quick Control
screen (p.427).
Selecting [Clear all items] will delete all the items set. The screen will
then be blank.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
429
Custom Quick Control
Available Items and Display Sizes for the Screen Layout
(Vertical x horizontal cells)
Item and Size
Shooting mode
1x1
k
1x2
1x3
2x2
2x3
k
Shutter speed
Aperture
k
k
k
k
k
ISO speed
k
Exposure compensation/
AEB setting
k
k
k
k
k
Flash exposure
compensation
k
k
Picture Style
k
k
White balance
k
k
White balance shift/
bracketing
k
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Custom Controls
AF operation
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
AF point selection
Metering mode
Drive mode
k
k
Recording function/
card selection
k
k
k
k
Date/Time/Zone
k
k
k
k
k
External Speedlite control
Highlight tone priority
Viewfinder grid
Sensor cleaning
Depending on the items, the amount of displayable information and
settable functions for Quick Control may vary due to their display sizes.
The same item cannot be placed in multiple positions on the screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
430
Custom Quick Control
<A> Mode Settings and Display Conditions
You can also set Custom Quick Control and display the Custom Quick
Control screen in the <A> mode.
However, functions such as [Expo.comp./AEB] that are not displayed
on the menu screen for <A> mode will not appear on the Custom
Quick Control screen. Also, [ISO speed] and other functions that
cannot be set with the Quick Control screen in the <A> mode will be
grayed out.
Not displayed
Exposure compensation/AEB, Flash exposure compensation, White
balance shift/bracketing, Custom Controls, External Speedlite
control, Highlight tone priority
Grayed out (not settable with the Quick Control screen)
Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, Picture Style, White balance,
Auto Lighting Optimizer, AF operation, AF point selection, Metering
mode
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
431
3 Registering My MenuN
Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom
Functions whose settings you change frequently. You can also name
the registered menu tabs and press the <M> button to display the
My Menu tab first.
Adding My Menu Tab
Select [Add My Menu tab].
1
Under the [9] tab, select [Add My
Menu tab], then press <0>.
Select [OK].
X The [MY MENU1] tab is created.
You can create up to five menu tabs
2
by repeating steps 1 and 2.
Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)
Select [Configure: MY MENU*].
Turn the <6> dial to select
1
[Configure: MY MENU*] (tab for
registering menu items), then press
<0>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
432
3 Registering My MenuN
Select [Select items to register].
2
3
Register the desired items.
Select the desired item, then press
<0>.
Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.
You can register up to six items.
To return to the screen in step 2,
press the <M> button.
My Menu Tab Settings
You can sort and delete items under the
menu tab, and rename or delete the
menu tab.
Sort registered items
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select
[Sort registered items] and select the item whose order you want to
change. Then press <0>. With [z] displayed, turn the <5> dial to
change the order, then press <0>.
Delete selected items / Delete all items on tab
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all
registered items.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
433
3 Registering My MenuN
Delete tab
You can delete the My Menu tab currently displayed. Select [Delete
tab] to delete the [MY MENU*] tab.
Rename tab
You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].
Select [Rename tab].
1
2
Enter text.
Press the <L> button to delete any
unnecessary characters.
Press the <Q> button. The text
palette will be highlighted with a color
frame, and text can be entered.
Operate the <5> dial or <9> to
move the and select the desired
character. Then press <0> to enter
it.
You can enter up to 16 characters.
Exit the setting.
After entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
X The name is saved.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
434
3 Registering My MenuN
Deleting all My Menu tabs / Deleting all items
You can delete all My Menu tabs and
delete all My Menu items.
Delete all My Menu tabs
You can delete all My Menu tabs. When you select [Delete all My
Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] will be
deleted and the [9] tab will revert to its default.
Delete all items
You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to
[MY MENU5] tabs and keep the tabs. The menu tab(s) will remain.
When [Delete all items] is selected, all the items registered under
all the created tabs will be deleted.
If you do [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs], tab names renamed
with [Rename tab] will also be deleted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
435
3 Registering My MenuN
Menu Display Settings
You can select [Menu display] to set the
menu screen that is to appear first when
you press the <M> button.
Normal display
Displays the last displayed menu screen.
Display from My Menu tab
Displays with the [9] tab selected.
Display only My Menu tab
Only the [9] tab is displayed. (The z, 2, 3, 5, and 8 tabs will
not be displayed.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
436
w: Registering Custom Shooting Modes
N
You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting mode,
menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting
modes under the Mode Dial’s <w>, <x>, and <y> positions.
Select [Custom shooting mode
(C1-C3)].
Under the [54] tab, select [Custom
shooting mode (C1-C3)], then press
<0>.
1
Select [Register settings].
2
Register the Custom shooting
3 mode.
Select the Custom shooting mode to
be registered, then press <0>.
Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.
439) will be registered under the
Mode Dial’s C* position.
Automatic Updating
If you change a setting while you shoot in the <w>, <x>, or <y>
mode, the respective Custom shooting mode can be automatically
updated to reflect the changes in settings. To enable this automatic
update, in step 2, set [Auto update set.] to [Enable].
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes
In step 2, if you select [Clear settings], the settings of respective
modes will revert to the default settings with no Custom shooting modes
registered.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
437
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN
Settings To Be Registered
Shooting functions
Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, AF operation,
AF area selection mode, AF point, Drive mode, Metering mode,
Exposure compensation amount, Flash exposure compensation
amount
Menu functions
[z1] Image quality, Image review time, Beep, Release shutter
without card, Lens aberration correction, Flash firing, E-TTL II
flash metering, Flash sync speed in Av mode
[z2] Exposure compensation/AEB, ISO speed settings, Auto
Lighting Optimizer, White balance, Custom White Balance,
White balance shift/bracketing, Color space
[z3] Picture Style, Long exposure noise reduction, High ISO
speed noise reduction, Highlight tone priority, Multiple
exposure (settings), HDR Mode (settings)
[z4] Interval timer, Bulb timer, Anti-flicker shooting, Mirror lockup,
Crop/aspect ratio
[z5 (Live View shooting)]
Live View shooting, AF method, Continuous AF, Grid display,
Exposure simulation
[z6 (Live View shooting)]
Silent LV shooting, Metering timer
[z4 (Movie)]
Movie Servo AF, AF method, Grid display, Movie recording
size, Sound recording
[z5 (Movie)]
Silent LV shooting, Metering timer, Movie recording count,
Movie play count, Silent control, V button function, Time-
lapse movie (settings)
[21] Case 1, Case 2, Case 3, Case 4, Case 5, Case 6
[22] AI Servo 1st image priority, AI Servo 2nd image priority
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
438
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN
[23] Lens electronic MF, AF-assist beam firing, One-Shot AF
release priority
[24] Lens drive when AF impossible, Selectable AF point, Select
AF area selection mode, AF area selection method,
Orientation linked AF point, Initial AF point,
Auto AF point selection: EOS iTR AF
AI Servo AF,
[25] Manual AF point selection pattern, AF point display during
focus, VF display illumination, AF Microadjustment
[x2] Slide show (settings), Image jump with 6
[x3] Highlight alert, AF point display, Playback grid, Histogram
display, Movie play count, Magnification (approx.)
[51] File numbering, Auto rotate, Eye-Fi settings
[52] Auto power off, LCD brightness, Viewfinder display
[53] Auto cleaning, z button display options, m button
function
[81] Exposure level increments, ISO speed setting increments,
Bracketing auto cancel, Bracketing sequence, Number of
bracketed shots, Safety shift, Same exposure for new
aperture
[82] Set shutter speed range, Set aperture range
[83] Dial direction during Tv/Av, Multi function lock, Custom
Controls, Add cropping information, Default Erase option,
Retract lens on power off
My Menu settings will not be registered under Custom shooting modes.
Even when the Mode Dial is set to <w>, <x>, or <y>, you can still
change shooting function settings and menu settings.
By pressing the <B> button, you can check which shooting mode is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
439
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
440
14
Reference
This chapter provides reference information for camera
features, system accessories, etc.
Certification Logo
Select [54: Certification Logo Display] and press <0> to
display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other
certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the
camera body, and on the camera’s package.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
441
B Button Functions
When the camera is ready to shoot,
pressing the <B> button can switch
the display as follows: Camera settings,
Under the [53] tab, [z button
display options] enables you to select
the options displayed when the <B>
button is pressed.
Select the desired display option and
press <0> to append a checkmark
[X].
After completing the selections, select
[OK].
Camera settings
Electronic level
Custom Quick
Control screen
Quick Control screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
442
B Button Functions
If you turn off the power while the Electronic level, Quick Control screen,
or Custom Quick Control screen is displayed, the same screen will be
displayed when you turn on the power again. To cancel this function,
press the <B> button a number of times until the screen is blank,
then turn off the power switch.
Note that you cannot remove the [X] for all four display options.
The [Displays camera settings] sample screen is displayed in English
for all languages.
Even if you uncheck the [Electronic level] so it does not appear, it will
still appear for Live View shooting and movie shooting when you press
the <B> button.
While the Quick Control screen or Custom Quick Control screen is
displayed, pressing the <Q> button enables you to set a function with
Quick Control (p.61).
Camera Settings
Shooting mode
registered under the
Mode Dial’s wxy
(p.193)
(p.178)
(p.134)
Transfer of some
images failed*
(p.395)
(p.185)
(p.196)
* This icon is displayed when the transfer of some images failed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
443
B Button Functions
Quick Control Screen
Aperture
Shutter speed
Shooting mode
AE lock
Highlight tone priority
ISO speed
Exposure level
indicator
Exposure
compensation
Exposure
compensation
Custom Controls
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
White balance
correction
Picture Style
AF operation
Image-recording
quality
Quick Control icon
Possible shots
Maximum burst/Number of
Battery level
remaining multiple exposures
White balance
Metering mode
Card indicator
Multiple exposures/HDR/
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Eye-Fi card transmission status
GPS acquisition status
Drive mode
Card selection icon
Flash-ready/FE lock/
High-speed sync
Custom Quick Control Screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
444
B Button Functions
Button Functions for the Quick Control and
Custom Quick Control Screens
When you press the <n>, <o>, <m>, or <S> button,
the setting screen appears and you can use <6>, <5>, <9>, or
<B> to set the functions.
Metering mode / White balance
AF operation / Drive mode
ISO speed /
AF point selection
Flash exposure compensation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
445
3 Checking the Battery Information
You can check the battery’s condition on the LCD monitor. Each Battery
Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 has a unique serial number, and you can register
multiple batteries to the camera. When you use this feature, you can
check the registered batteries’ approximate remaining capacity and
operation history.
Select [Battery info.].
Under the [53] tab, select [Battery
info.], then press <0>.
X The battery info. screen will appear.
Battery position
Battery model or household power source
being used.
displayed together with the remaining
battery level shown in 1% increments.
The number of shots taken with the current
battery. The number is reset when the
battery is recharged.
Battery’s recharge performance level is
displayed in one of three levels.
(Green): Battery’s recharge performance is fine.
(Green): Battery’s recharge performance is slightly degraded.
(Red): Purchasing a new battery is recommended.
Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is recommended. If
you use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, the camera’s full
performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.
The shutter count is the number of still photos taken. (Movies are not
counted.)
The battery information will also be displayed when Battery Pack LP-
E6N/LP-E6 is used with Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately). If AA/R6
batteries are used, only the remaining battery level will be displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
446
3 Checking the Battery Information
If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the
instructions in the message.
Registering Batteries to the Camera
You can register up to six LP-E6N/LP-E6 batteries to the camera. To
register multiple batteries to the camera, follow the procedure below for
each battery.
Press the <B> button.
1
With the battery info. screen
displayed, press the <B> button.
X The battery history screen will
appear.
X If the battery is not registered, it will
be grayed out.
Select [Register].
X The confirmation dialog will appear.
2
3
Select [OK].
X The battery will be registered and the
battery history screen will reappear.
X The grayed out battery number will
now be displayed in white.
Press the <M> button. The battery
info. screen will reappear.
The battery cannot be registered if Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately)
using AA/R6 batteries is attached or the camera is powered by AC
Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately).
If six batteries are already registered, [Register] cannot be selected. To
delete unnecessary battery information, see page 449.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
447
3 Checking the Battery Information
Labeling Serial Numbers on Batteries
It is convenient to label each registered Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6
with their serial numbers, using commercially-available labels.
Write the serial number on a
label.
Write the serial number displayed on
the battery history screen on a label
approx. 25 mm x 15 mm / 1.0 in. x 0.6
in. in size.
Serial number
1
Remove the battery and affix the
b29fda30
2 label.
Set the power switch to <2>.
Open the battery compartment cover
and remove the battery.
Affix the label as shown in the
illustration (on the side with no
electrical contacts).
Repeat this procedure for all of your
batteries so you can easily see the
serial number.
Do not affix the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in
step 2. Otherwise, the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert the
battery or impossible to turn on the camera.
If you use Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately), the label may peel off
as you repeatedly insert and remove the battery. If it peels off, affix a new
label.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
448
3 Checking the Battery Information
Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery
You can check the remaining capacity of any battery (even when not
installed) and also when it was last used.
Look for the serial number.
Date last used
Serial number
Refer to the battery’s serial number
label and look for the battery’s serial
number on the battery history screen.
X You can check the respective
battery’s remaining capacity and the
date when it was last used.
Remaining capacity
of a battery
Deleting the Registered Battery Information
1 Select [Delete info.].
<0>.
2 Select the battery information to be deleted.
Select the battery information to be deleted, then press <0>.
X [X] will appear.
To delete information for another battery, repeat this procedure.
3 Press the <L> button.
X The confirmation dialog will appear.
4 Select [OK].
X The battery information will be deleted and the screen in step 1
will reappear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
449
Using a Household Power Outlet
With AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately), you can connect the
camera to a household power outlet and do not have to worry about the
remaining battery level.
Connect the DC Coupler’s plug.
1
Connect the DC Coupler’s plug to the
AC Adapter’s socket.
Connect the power cord.
2
Connect the power cord as shown in
the illustration.
After using the camera, unplug the
power plug from the power outlet.
Place the cord in the groove.
3
Insert the DC Coupler’s cord to the
groove carefully without damaging
the cord.
Insert the DC Coupler.
4
Open the battery compartment cover
and open the DC Coupler cord hole
cover.
Insert the DC Coupler securely until it
locks and put the cord through the
DC Coupler cord hole
hole.
Close the cover.
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord or DC Coupler while the
camera’s power switch is set to <1>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
450
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can
automatically transfer captured images to a computer or upload them to
an online service via a wireless LAN.
The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on
how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image
transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or
contact the card manufacturer.
The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card
functions (including wireless transfer). In case of a problem
with an Eye-Fi card, please check with the card manufacturer.
Also note that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in
many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card
is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been
approved for use in your area, please check with the card
manufacturer.
1
Select [Eye-Fi settings].
2
Under the [51] tab, select [Eye-Fi
settings], then press <0>.
This menu is displayed only when an
Eye-Fi card is inserted into the
camera.
Enable Eye-Fi transmission.
3
Select [Eye-Fi trans.], then press
<0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
If you set [Disable], there will be no
automatic transmission even with the
Eye-Fi card inserted (transmission
status icon I).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
451
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
Display the connection
4 information.
Select [Connection info.], then press
<0>.
Check the [Access point SSID:].
Check that an access point is
displayed for [Access point SSID:].
You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s
MAC address and firmware version.
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
5
Take the picture.
6
X The picture is transferred and the
[H] icon switches from gray (not
connected) to one of the icons below.
For transferred images, [O] is
displayed in the shooting information
Transmission status
H(Gray) Not connected : No connection with access point.
H(Blinking) Connecting... : Connecting to access point.
H(Illuminated) Connected : Connection to access point established.
H(d) Transferring...
: Image transfer to access point in
progress.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
452
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards
If “ ” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card
information. Turn the camera’s power switch off and on again.
Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In
hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are
prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.
If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and
computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s instruction manual.
Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image
transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted.
The Eye-Fi card may become hot as it transmits.
The battery power will be consumed faster.
During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.
If you insert a wireless LAN card other than an Eye-Fi card, [Eye-Fi
settings] will not appear. Also, the transmission status icon <H> will not
appear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
453
System Map
ST-E2 ST-E3-RT 90EX 270EX II 320EX 430EX II 600EX-RT Macro Ring Lite Macro Twin Lite
/600EX
MR-14EX II
MT-24EX
Bundled
Accessories
Dioptric Adjustment
Lenses Eg
Eyecup Eg
Anti-Fog
Eyepiece Eg
Cable protector
Wide Strap
Angle Finder C
Battery Pack
LP-E6N*1
Battery Charger
LC-E6 or LC-E6E
AC Adapter DC Coupler
AC-E6
DR-E6
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-E6
Car Battery
Cable CB-570
Car Battery
Battery Grip
BG-E11
Hand Strap E2
Charger
CBC-E6
Battery Magazine
BGM-E11L for
LP-E6N/LP-E6
Battery Magazine
BGM-E11A for
AA/R6 batteries
Leather Case EH20-L
(attached to BG-E11)
(attached to BG-E11)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
454
System Map
GPS Receiver
GP-E2*2
Timer Remote Remote
Controller Switch
TC-80N3 RS-80N3
Wireless
Controller
LC-5
Remote Controller
RC-6
EF lenses
External microphone
HDMI Cable
HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)
TV/Video
Wireless File
Transmitter
WFT-E7 (Ver. 2)/
WFT-E7*3
EOS DIGITAL
Solution Disk
Wireless LAN
access point
Wireless LAN adapter
Ethernet port
Interface Cable IFC-150U II
(1.5 m/4.9 ft.)
USB port
Interface Cable IFC-500U II*4 (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)
Computer
CF Card
Card reader
Connect Station
CS100
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory card
PictBridge-compatible printer
*1: Battery Pack LP-E6 can also be used.
*2: To use the GP-E2 with a cable, the GP-E2’s firmware must be
updated to Version 2.0.0 or later and Interface Cable IFC-40AB II or IFC-150AB II must be used.
*3: To use the older model WFT-E7 (not Version 2), the WFT-E7’s firmware must be updated
and Interface Cable IFC-40AB II or IFC-150AB II must be used.
*4: With IFC-500U II, the communication speed will be equivalent to Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0).
* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
455
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
: Not selectable/Disabled
Function
All image quality settings selectable
Crop/aspect ratio
A
d
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
s
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
f
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
a
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
F
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Automatically set/Auto ISO
o
o
o
ISO speed
Manually set
Automatically set/Auto
Manual selection
Auto
Picture Style
Preset
White balance
Custom
Color temperature setting
Correction/Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
o
o
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction
Highlight tone priority
Peripheral illumination correction
k
k
o
o
Lens aberration
correction
Chromatic aberration correction
1
Anti-flicker shooting*
sRGB
Color space
Adobe RGB
1
One-Shot AF*
1
AI Servo AF*
1
AI Focus AF*
o
1
AF area selection mode*
AF point
o
k
AF
Manual focusing (MF)
1
AF Microadjustment*
u (face)+Tracking*
FlexZone - Single*
2
k
k
k
2
2
Continuous AF*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
456
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Function
A
d
s
f
a
F
Evaluative metering
Partial metering
Spot metering
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Metering
Center-weighted average metering
Program shift
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
3
k*
Exposure compensation
AEB
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
4
*
AE lock
Depth-of-field preview
HDR shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
Exposure
Multiple exposures
1
Interval timer*
k
Bulb timer
Mirror Lockup*
k
k
k
k
1
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Single shooting
k
k
High-speed continuous shooting
Low-speed continuous shooting
Silent single shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
Drive
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Silent continuous shooting
10-sec. self-timer/Remote control
2-sec. self-timer/Remote control
Flash exposure compensation
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
1
FE lock*
External
Speedlite
Function settings
Custom Function settings
Live View shooting
Quick Control
k
k
*1: Settable only with viewfinder shooting.
*2: Settable only during Live View shooting.
*3: Settable only when Auto ISO is set.
*4: With Auto ISO, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
457
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Movie Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
: Not selectable/Disabled
1
Movies
Still Photos*
Function
A
d/F s f
a
A
d/F/s/f
a
y
M
y
M
k
k
All image quality settings selectable
(movie)
k
k
k
k
k
All image quality settings selectable
(still photos)
k
k
k
k
Time-lapse movie
k
o
k
o
k
o
k
o
k
k
Automatically set/Auto ISO
ISO speed
o
o
o
o
k
Manually set
k
k
k
k
Automatically set/Auto
Manual selection
Auto
Picture
Style
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Preset
Custom
White
balance
Color temperature setting
Correction
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
o
o
k
k
k
k
o
o
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction*
Highlight tone priority
2
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Peripheral illumination
correction
Lens
aberration
correction
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Chromatic aberration
correction
k
o
k
o
k
o
k
o
k
o
k
o
sRGB
Color
space
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Adobe RGB
u+Tracking
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
FlexiZone - Single
Manual focusing (MF)
Movie Servo AF
AF
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
458
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
1
Movies
d/F s f
k
Still Photos*
Function
A
a
A
d/F/s/f
a
y
M
y
M
k
Metering
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Program shift
AE lock
3
3
k
k
k
k
k
k
*
k
k
*
4
4
k*
k*
Exposure Exposure compensation
AEB
Depth-of-field preview
Single shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
High-speed continuous
shooting
Low-speed continuous
shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Silent single shooting
Drive
Silent continuous
shooting
10-sec. self-timer/
k
k
k
k
k
k
5
Remote control*
2-sec. self-timer/Remote
5
control*
External Speedlite
Sound recording
Time code
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Quick Control
k
k
k
*1: Indicates still photo shooting during movie shooting.
*2: Multi Shot Noise Reduction cannot be set.
*3: With Auto ISO, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
*4: Settable only when Auto ISO is set.
*5: Works only before you start shooting a movie.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
459
Menu Settings
Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting
z: Shooting 1 (Red)
1 / 41 / 61
Page
Image quality
73 / 83 / 7K / 8K / 75 / 85 / 7a /
8a / b / c
Image review time
Beep
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold
Enable / Disable
Release shutter
without card
Enable / Disable
Peripheral illumination: Enable / Disable
Chromatic aberration: Enable / Disable
Lens aberration
correction
Flash firing / E-TTL II metering / Flash sync.
speed in Av mode / Flash function settings /
Flash C.Fn settings / Clear settings
External Speedlite
control
Shaded menu options are not displayed in the <A> mode.
What is displayed under [z1: Image quality] depends on the [Record
[Rec. separately] is set, set the image quality for each card.
With movie shooting, certain menu items are not displayed. Also, the
[z6] tab will not appear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
460
Menu Settings
Page
z: Shooting 2 (Red)
Exposure compensation/ 1/3- and 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops
AEB setting*
(AEB ±3 stops)
ISO speed / ISO speed range /
Auto ISO range / Minimum shutter speed
ISO speed settings
Disable / Low / Standard / High
Disabled in M or B modes
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Q (Ambience priority) / Q (White priority) /
w
White balance
10000)
Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance
White balance correction: B/A/M/G bias, 9 levels each
White Balance Shift/
Bracketing
White balance bracketing: B/A and M/G bias,
single-level increments, ±3 levels
Color space
sRGB / Adobe RGB
* During movie shooting, [Expo.comp./AEB] will be [Exposure comp.].
z: Shooting 3 (Red)
DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /
RLandscape / u Fine Detail /
SNeutral / UFaithful / VMonochrome /
WUser Def. 1-3
Picture Style
Long exposure noise
reduction
Disable / Auto / Enable
High ISO speed noise Disable / Low / Standard / High /
reduction
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Highlight tone priority Disable / Enable
Obtain data to be used by EOS software to
delete dust spots
Dust Delete Data
Multiple exposure
Multiple exposure / Multiple exposure control /
Number of exposures / Save source images /
Continue multiple exposure
Adjust dynamic range / Effect / Continuous
HDR / Auto Image Align / Save source images
HDR Mode
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
461
Menu Settings
z: Shooting 4* (Red)
Interval timer
Page
Disable / Enable (Interval / Number of shots)
Disable / Enable (Exposure time)
Disable / Enable
Bulb timer
Anti-flicker shooting
Disable / Press V twice to shoot / Shoot 1/8
sec after press / Shoot 1/4 sec after press /
Shoot 1/2 sec after press / Shoot 1 sec. after
press / Shoot 2 sec. after press
Mirror lockup
Full-frame / 1.3x (crop) / 1.6x (crop) / 1:1
Crop/aspect ratio
ratio)
* In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z2].
z: Shooting 5* (Red)
Live View shooting
AF method
Enable / Disable
u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Single
Disable / Enable
Continuous AF
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
Enable / During e / Disable
Exposure simulation
* In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z3].
z: Shooting 6 (Red)
Silent LV shooting
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable
4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /
10 min. / 30 min.
Metering timer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
462
Menu Settings
2: AF1 (Purple)
Page
Case 1
Versatile multi purpose setting
Continue to track the subjects, ignoring
possible obstacles
Case 2
Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering
AF points
Case 3
For subjects that accelerate or decelerate
quickly
Case 4
For erratic subjects moving quickly in any
direction
Case 5
For subjects that change speed and move
erratically
Case 6
2: AF2 (Purple)
AI Servo 1st image
priority
Shooting speed priority / Equal priority / Focus
priority
AI Servo 2nd image
priority
2: AF3 (Purple)
Lens electronic MF
AF-assist beam firing
Enable after One-Shot AF / Disable after One-
Shot AF / Disable in AF mode
Enable / Disable / IR AF assist beam only
Release priority / Focus priority
One-Shot AF release
priority
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
463
Menu Settings
2: AF4 (Purple)
Page
Lens drive when AF
impossible
Continue focus search / Stop focus search
61 points / Only cross-type AF points / 15
points / 9 points
Selectable AF point
Manual selection: Spot AF / Manual selection:
1 point AF / Expand AF area:
/ Expand AF
Select AF area
selection mode
area: Surround / Manual selection: Zone AF /
Auto selection: 61 point AF
AF area selection
method
S 9 M-Fn button / S 9 Main Dial
Same for both vertical/horizontal /
Separate AF points: Area+point /
Separate AF points: Point only
Orientation linked AF
point
Initial
Manual
AF point selected /
AF point / Auto
Initial AF point,
Servo AF
AI
Auto AF point
selection: EOS iTR AF
Enable / Disable
2: AF5 (Purple)
Manual AF point
selection pattern
Stops at AF area edges / Continuous
Selected (constant) / All (constant) / Selected
(pre-AF, focused) / Selected (focused) /
Disable display
AF point display during
focus
Auto / Enable / Disable
VF display illumination
AF Microadjustment
AF point during AI Servo AF: Non illuminated /
Illuminated
Disable / All by same amount / Adjust by lens
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
464
Menu Settings
3: Playback 1 (Blue)
Protect images
Rotate image
Page
Protect images
Rotate images
Erase images
Erase images
Print order
Specify images to be printed (DPOF)
Specify images for a photobook
Copy images between cards
Photobook Set-up
Image copy
RAW image processing Process 1 images
3: Playback 2 (Blue)
Cropping
Resize
Partially crop JPEG images
Downsize JPEG image’s pixel count
[OFF] / l / m / n / o / p
Rating
Set playback description / Display time /
Repeat, and start auto playback
Slide show
Image transfer
Image jump w/6
Image selection/transfer / RAW+JPEG transfer
1 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /
Folder / Movies / Stills / Protect / Rating
3: Playback 3 (Blue)
Highlight alert
Disable / Enable
AF point display
Playback grid
Disable / Enable
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
Brightness / RGB
Histogram display
Movie playback count* Rec time / Time code
1x (no magnification) / 2x (magnify from center) / 4x
(magnify from center) / 8x (magnify from center) / 16x
(magnify from center) / Actual size (from selected
point) / Same as last magnification (from center)
Magnification (approx.)
Control over HDMI
Disable / Enable
* The setting is linked to the [Time code]’s [Movie play count] under the [z5
(Movie)] tab.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
465
Menu Settings
5: Set-up 1 (Yellow)
Page
Recording function:
Standard / Auto switch card / Record
Record function+card/ separately / Record to multiple
folder selection
Record/playback / Playback: f / g
Folder: Selecting and creating a folder
File numbering
File name
Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset
Preset code / User setting 1 / User setting 2
OnzD / OnD / Off
Auto rotate
Format card
Erase data on the card by formatting
Displayed when a commercially-available Eye-
Fi card is inserted
Eye-Fi settings
5: Set-up 2 (Yellow)
1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. / 30
min. / Disable
Auto power off
Auto: Adjustable to one of three brightness levels
Manual: Adjustable to one of seven brightness levels
LCD brightness
Date (year, month, day) / Time (hr., min., sec.) /
Daylight saving time / Time zone
Date/Time/Zone
Select the interface language
Electronic level: Hide / Show
Grid display: Hide / Show
LanguageK
Show/hide in viewfinder:
Viewfinder display
GPS device settings
Battery / White balance / Drive mode / AF
operation / Metering mode / Image quality /
Flicker detection
-
Settable when the GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold
separately) is attached
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
466
Menu Settings
Page
5: Set-up 3 (Yellow)
Video system
For NTSC / For PAL
Power source / Remaining capacity / Shutter
count / Recharge performance / Battery
registration / Serial number / Battery history
Battery information
Sensor cleaning
Auto cleaning f: Enable / Disable
Clean now f
Clean manually
Displays camera settings / Electronic level / Quick
Control screen / Custom Quick Control screen
z button display
options
Customize the functions and layout for Quick
Control screen
Custom Quick Control
m button function
Rating / Protect
Displayed when Wireless File Transmitter
WFT-E7 (Ver. 2, sold separately) is attached.
Communication
settings
-
When using GPS device or a Wireless File Transmitter, be sure to check
the countries and areas of use, and use the device in accordance with
the laws and regulations of the country or region.
Note that when connecting GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately) with a
cable, preparations as below are necessary.
- Update the GP-E2’s firmware to Version 2.0.0 or later. (Using the cable
for connection is not possible with the firmware version earlier than
Version 2.0.0.)
- Interface Cable IFC-40AB II or IFC-150AB II (both sold separately)
must be used.
When using the GP-E2 attached to the hot shoe, preparations as above
are not necessary. For how to update the GP-E2’s firmware, refer to the
Canon Web site.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
467
Menu Settings
5: Set-up 4 (Yellow)
Page
Register current camera settings to the Mode
Dial’s w, x, and y positions
Custom shooting mode
(C1-C3)
Clear all camera settings Resets the camera to the default settings
Display copyright information / Enter author’s
Copyright information name / Enter copyright details /
Delete copyright information
Some of the camera’s certification logos are
displayed
Certification Logo
Display
-
Select to update the firmware of the camera,
lens, Speedlite, or Wireless File Transmitter
z firmware ver.
8: Custom Functions (Orange)
C.Fn1: Exposure
C.Fn2: Exposure
C.Fn3: Others
C.Fn4: Clear
Customize camera functions as desired
Clear all Custom Function settings
9: My Menu (Green)
Add My Menu tab
Add My Menu tabs 1-5
Delete all My Menu tabs Delete all My Menu tabs
Delete all items
Menu display
Delete all items under My Menu tabs 1-5
Normal display / Display from My Menu tab /
Display only My Menu tab
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
468
Menu Settings
Movie Shooting
z: Shooting 4*1 (Movie) (Red)
Page
Movie Servo AF
AF method
Enable / Disable
u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Single
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
• 1920x1080 / 1280x720 / 640x480
• NTSC: 59.94p / 29.97p / 23.98p
PAL: 50.00p / 25.00p
Movie recording size
• ALL-I (For editing) / IPB (Standard)
Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable
Recording level
2
Sound recording*
Wind filter: Disable / Enable
Attenuator: Disable / Enable
*1: In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z2].
*2: In the <A> mode, [Sound recording] settings will be [On] [Off].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
469
Menu Settings
z: Shooting 5*1 (Movie) (Red)
Page
Silent LV shooting
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable
4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. /
1 min. / 10 min. / 30 min.
Metering timer
Count up / Start time setting / Movie recording
Time code
*2
*3
count / Movie play count / Drop frame
Silent Control
Enable h / Disable h
V button function
/z / q/z /
/k / q/k
Disable / Enable (Interval / No. of shots / Time
required / Playback time/ Card- time left)
Time-lapse movie
*1: In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z3].
*2: The setting is linked to [Movie play count] under the [x3] tab.
*3: Displayed when 8 (59.94 fps) or 6 (29.97 fps) is set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
470
Troubleshooting Guide
If a problem occurs with the camera, first consult this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Power-Related Problems
The battery does not recharge.
If the battery’s remaining capacity is 94% or higher, the battery will not
Do not use any battery other than genuine Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-
E6.
The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.
If (1) the battery charger or battery has a problem or (2) communication
with the battery failed (with a non-Canon battery pack), the protection
circuit will stop charging, and the charge lamp will blink in orange at a
high speed. In the case of (1), unplug the charger’s power plug from the
power outlet. Detach and reattach the battery to the charger. Wait a few
minutes, then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the
problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
The charger’s lamp does not blink.
If the internal temperature of the battery attached to the charger is
high, the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp
off). During charging, if the battery’s temperature becomes high for
any reason, charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks). When the
battery temperature goes down, charging will resume automatically.
The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to <
1>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
471
Troubleshooting Guide
The access lamp still lights or blinks
even when the power switch is <2>.
If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card, the
access lamp will remain on or continue to blink for a few seconds. When
the image recording is completed, the power will turn off automatically.
[Does this battery/do these batteries display the Canon logo?]
is displayed.
Do not use any battery other than a genuine Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6.
If the battery contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
The battery performance may have degraded. See [53: Battery info.]
battery performance is poor, replace the battery with a new one.
The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor frequently.
• Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged period.
• The Eye-Fi card’s communication function is operating.
The camera turns off by itself.
Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take
Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will
still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min. (The camera’s
power does not turn off.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
472
Troubleshooting Guide
Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
The viewfinder is dark.
No images can be shot or recorded.
If you are using an SD card, slide the card’s write-protect switch to the
If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to
If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode and the focus indicator
<o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be taken. Press the
shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or focus
The card cannot be used.
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
473
Troubleshooting Guide
I have to press the shutter button twice completely
to take a picture.
If [z4: Mirror lockup] is set to [Press V twice to shoot], set it to
[Disable].
The image is out of focus or blurred.
If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.
In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter
use a tripod.
There are fewer AF points.
Depending on the attached lens, the number of usable AF points and
patterns will differ. The lenses are categorized into nine groups from A
to I. Check which group your lens belongs to. Using a lens in Groups F
The AF point is blinking or two AF points are displayed.
Regarding lighting up or blinking of the AF points when you press the
The manually-selected AF point (or zone) and the registered AF point
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
474
Troubleshooting Guide
The AF points do not light up in red.
The AF points light up in red when focus is achieved in low-light
conditions.
In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, and <F> modes, you can set
whether to have the AF points light in red when focus is achieved
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
The continuous shooting speed may become slower depending on the
shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions, brightness, lens, flash use,
In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become
If you use Battery Pack LP-E6 and shoot in low temperatures (battery
temperature is low), the high-speed continuous shooting speed may
The continuous shooting speed may become slower if the remaining
If you use Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately) with AA/R6 batteries,
the maximum continuous shooting speed will be approx. 3.0 fps for
high-speed continuous shooting.
If you set [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] to [Enable] and shoot under a
flickering light source, the continuous shooting speed may decrease
slightly, the shooting interval may become irregular, or the release time
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
If you shoot something that has fine detail such as a field of grass, the
file size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower
than the number mentioned on page 151.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
475
Troubleshooting Guide
I cannot shoot in the 4:3 or 16:9 aspect ratio.
During viewfinder shooting, you cannot shoot in either the 4:3 or the
16:9 aspect ratio even when the aspect ratio is set. During Live View
shooting, you can shoot images in the 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratios
ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected.
If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the settable ISO
speed range will be ISO 200 - ISO 6400. Even if you expand the
settable ISO speed range with [ISO speed range], you cannot select
the L (equivalent to ISO 50) or H (equivalent to ISO 12800). When
[z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable], ISO 100/125/160, L,
Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation,
the image comes out bright.
Set [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable]. When [Low],
[Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image may come
I cannot set the exposure compensation while both manual
exposure and Auto ISO are set.
Even if an exposure compensation is performed, it will not be applied
for flash photography.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
476
Troubleshooting Guide
Multi Shot Noise Reduction cannot be set.
If the image-recording quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, [Multi
Shot Noise Reduction] cannot be set.
The Live View image or movie shooting image is
not displayed during multiple-exposure shooting.
If [On:ContShtng] is set, Live View display, image review after image
Live View shooting ends when multiple exposure
shooting is performed.
If you perform Live View shooting with [On:ContShtng], Live View
function will end automatically when the first exposure is taken. Take
the second and subsequent exposures while looking through the
viewfinder.
The multiple-exposure image is shot in 1 quality.
When the image-recording quality is set to 41 or 61, the
When I use the <f> mode with flash,
the shutter speed becomes slow.
If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed
automatically becomes slow (slow-sync shooting) so that both the
subject and background are properly exposed. To prevent a slow
shutter speed, under [z1: External Speedlite control], set [Flash
sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/200-1/60sec. auto] or [1/200 sec.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
477
Troubleshooting Guide
The flash does not fire.
Make sure the flash (or PC sync cord) is securely attached to the
camera.
If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z6:
The flash always fires at full output.
If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash will
When the flash Custom Function setting for [Flash metering mode] is
set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the flash will always be fired at
Flash exposure compensation cannot be set.
If flash exposure compensation is already set with the Speedlite, flash
exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera. When the
external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled (set to 0),
flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera.
High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.
Under [z1: External Speedlite control], set [Flash sync. speed in
The shutter makes two shooting sounds
during Live View shooting.
If you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
478
Troubleshooting Guide
During Live View or movie shooting, a white
icon is displayed.
or red E
It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white
> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may deteriorate.
<
If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View or
Movie shooting stops by itself.
If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop
out the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s Web site.
If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically.
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.
If the shooting mode is <A>, <d>, <s>, <f>, or <F>, the ISO
speed will be set automatically. In the <a> mode, you can freely set
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
479
Troubleshooting Guide
The manually set ISO speed changes when
switching to movie shooting.
If you shoot a movie with manual exposure set to L (equivalent to ISO
50), the ISO speed setting will switch to ISO 100. Even if you switch
back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not revert to L.
The exposure changes during movie shooting.
If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting, the
changes in the exposure may be recorded.
Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in the
exposure regardless of whether the lens’s maximum aperture changes
or not. The changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result.
The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear
during movie shooting.
Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources
during movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or
color tone may be recorded. In the <a> or <s> mode, a slow
shutter speed may reduce the problem. The problem may be more
noticeable in time-lapse movie shooting.
The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.
If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a moving
subject, the image may look distorted. The problem may be more
noticeable in time-lapse movie shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
480
Troubleshooting Guide
When I shoot still photos during movie shooting,
the movie shooting stops.
To shoot still photos during movie shooting, using a CF card capable of
UDMA transfer or a UHS-I SD card is recommended.
Setting a lower image quality for still photos or shooting fewer
continuous still photos may resolve the problem.
Time code is off.
Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy
between the actual time and time code. When you want to edit a movie
using time code, it is recommended not to shoot still photos during
movie shooting.
Operation Problems
I cannot change the setting with the <6>, <5> or <9>.
A camera button or dial does not work as expected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
481
Troubleshooting Guide
Display Problems
The menu screen shows fewer tabs and options.
In the <A> mode, only certain menu tabs and options are displayed.
Under the [9] tab, [Menu display] is set to [Display only My Menu
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).
Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character
The fourth character in the file name changes.
With [51: File name], select the camera’s unique file name or the file
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may
The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
482
Troubleshooting Guide
The date and time are not in the picture.
The shooting date and time do not appear in the picture. The date and
time are recorded in the image data as shooting information. When
printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture, using the
[###] is displayed.
If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the
In the viewfinder, the AF point display speed is slow.
In low temperatures, the display speed of the AF points may become
slower due to the AF point display device’s (liquid crystal)
characteristics. The display speed will return to normal at room
temperature.
The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.
If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow
or may look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.
[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.
[Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted in
the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect switch set to the
LOCK position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
483
Troubleshooting Guide
Playback Problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
A red box is displayed on the image.
The image cannot be erased.
The movie cannot be played back.
Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the camera.
Camera operation noise can be heard
when the movie is played back.
If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the
operation noise will also be recorded. Using an external microphone
The movie has still moments.
During autoexposure movie shooting, if there is a drastic change in the
exposure level, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
484
Troubleshooting Guide
No picture on the TV set.
Check if the [53: Video system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For
PAL] (depending on the video system of your TV set).
There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.
If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created
My card reader does not recognize the card.
Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, large-capacity
CF cards or SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized. In such a
case, connect your camera to the computer with the interface cable,
then transfer the images to your computer, using EOS Utility (EOS
I cannot process the RAW image.
41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the camera. Use
the EOS software, Digital Photo Professional to process the image
I cannot resize or crop the image.
JPEG c, 1, 41, and 61 images cannot be resized or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
485
Troubleshooting Guide
Sensor Cleaning Problems
The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning.
If you selected [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a noise, but no
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> / <2> at a short
Printing-Related Problems
There are fewer printing effects than
listed in the instruction manual.
Contents displayed on the screen vary depending on the printer. This
Computer Connection Problems
Communication between the connected camera and
computer does not work.
When using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z5: Time-lapse movie]
I cannot transfer images to a computer.
Install the EOS software (EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk CD-ROM) on
Check that EOS Utility’s main window is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
486
Error Codes
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the on-
screen instructions.
Error number
Cause and countermeasures
Number
Error Message and Solution
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the
lens contacts.
01
02
ÎClean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens, use a Canon
Card* cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card* or format card*
with camera.
ÎRemove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the
Cannot save images because card* is full. Replace card*.
04
06
ÎReplace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card
Sensor cleaning could not be performed. Turn the camera off and
on again.
10, 20 An error prevented shooting. Turn the camera off and on again or
30, 40 re-install the battery.
50, 60
70, 80
99
ÎOperate the power switch, remove and install the battery again, or
* If the error still persists, write down the error number and contact your nearest
Canon Service Center.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
487
Specifications
• Type
Type:
Recording media:
Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera
CF cards (Type I, UDMA 7 supported)
SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards
* UHS-I cards compatible.
Image sensor size:
Compatible lenses:
Approx. 36.0 x 24.0 mm
Canon EF lenses
* Excluding EF-S and EF-M lenses
(35mm-equivalent lens focal length is as indicated on
the lens)
Lens mount:
Canon EF mount
• Image Sensor
Type:
CMOS sensor
Effective pixels:
Approx. 50.6 megapixels
* Rounded off to the nearest 10,000th.
3:2
Aspect ratio:
Dust delete feature:
Auto/Manual, Appending Dust Delete Data
• Recording System
Recording format:
Image type:
Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0
JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original),
RAW+JPEG simultaneous recording possible
Pixels recorded
(With full-frame):
L (Large)
: Approx. 50.3 megapixels (8688 x 5792)
M1 (Medium 1): Approx. 39.3 megapixels (7680 x 5120)
M2 (Medium 2): Approx. 22.1 megapixels (5760 x 3840)
S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 12.4 megapixels (4320 x 2880)
S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.5 megapixels (1920 x 1280)
S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 0.35 megapixels (720 x 480)
RAW
M-RAW
S-RAW
: Approx. 50.3 megapixels (8688 x 5792)
: Approx. 28.0 megapixels (6480 x 4320)
: Approx. 12.4 megapixels (4320 x 2880)
Crop/aspect ratio:
Crop shooting and shooting with the set aspect ratio
possible.
Full-frame / Approx. 1.3x (crop) / Approx. 1.6x (crop) /
1:1 (aspect ratio) / 4:3 (aspect ratio) / 16:9 (aspect ratio)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
488
Specifications
Recording function:
Standard, Auto switch card, Record separately, Record
to multiple
Create/select a folder: Possible
File name:
File numbering:
Preset code / User setting 1 / User setting 2
Continuous, Auto reset, Manual reset
• Image Processing During Shooting
Picture Style:
Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Fine Detail,
Neutral, Faithful, Monochrome, User Defined 1 - 3
Auto (Ambience priority), Auto (White priority), Preset
(Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light, White
fluorescent light, Flash), Custom, Color temperature
setting (approx. 2500-10000 K), White balance
correction, and White balance bracketing provided
* Flash color temperature information transmission
possible
White balance:
Noise reduction:
Automatic image
brightness correction:
Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots
Auto Lighting Optimizer provided
Highlight tone priority: Provided
Lens aberration
correction:
Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration
correction
• Viewfinder
Type:
Eye-level pentaprism
Coverage:
Vertical/Horizontal approx. 100% (with Eye point approx.
21 mm, full-frame)
-1
Magnification:
Eye point:
Built-in dioptric
adjustment:
Approx. 0.71x (-1 m with 50mm lens at infinity)
-1
Approx. 21mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m
)
-1
Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m (dpt)
Focusing screen:
Grid display:
Electronic level:
Fixed
Provided
Provided
Function setting display: Battery, White balance, Drive mode, AF operation,
Metering mode, Image quality: JPEG/RAW, Flicker
detection, Warning symbol !
Mirror:
Quick-return type
Depth-of-field preview: Provided
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
489
Specifications
• Autofocus
Type:
TTL secondary image-registration, phase-difference
detection with the dedicated AF sensor
AF points:
61 (Cross-type AF point: Max. 41 points)
* Number of available AF points, cross-type points, and
Dual cross-type points vary depending on the lens.
* Dual cross-type focusing at f/2.8 with 5 AF points
vertically aligned at the center.
(AF group: When Group A lenses are used)
EV -2 - 18 (Conditions: f/2.8-sensitive center AF point,
One-Shot AF, room temperature, ISO 100)
One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual
focusing (MF)
Focusing brightness
range:
Focus operation:
AF area selection mode: Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), Single-point AF
(manual selection), AF point expansion (manual
selection: up, down, left, and right), AF point expansion
(manual selection: surround), Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), 61-point automatic selection AF
AF point automatic
selection conditions:
Based on EOS iTR AF setting
(Enables AF incorporating human face/color information)
* iTR: Intelligent Tracking and Recognition
AF Configuration Tool: Case 1 - 6
AI Servo AF
characteristics:
Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking,
AF point auto switching
AF Custom Functions: 16 functions
AF fine adjustment:
AF-assist beam:
AF Microadjustment (All lenses by the same amount,
Adjust by lens)
Emitted by the EOS-dedicated external Speedlite
• Exposure Control
Metering mode:
Approx. 150,000-pixel RGB+IR metering sensor and
252-zone TTL metering at max. aperture
EOS iSA (Intelligent Subject Analysis) system
• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)
• Partial metering (approx. 6.1% of viewfinder at center)
• Spot metering (approx. 1.3% of viewfinder at center)
• Center-weighted average metering
Brightness metering
range:
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
490
Specifications
Exposure control:
Program AE (Scene Intelligent Auto, Program), Shutter-
priority AE, Aperture-priority AE, Manual exposure, Bulb
exposure
ISO speed
(Recommended
exposure index):
Scene Intelligent Auto: ISO 100 - ISO 3200 set
automatically
P, Tv, Av, M, B: Auto ISO, ISO 100 - ISO 6400 (in 1/3- or
whole-stop increments), or ISO expansion to L
(equivalent to ISO 50) or H (equivalent to ISO 12800)
ISO speed range, Auto ISO range, and Auto ISO
minimum shutter speed settable
ISO speed settings:
Exposure
Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
compensation:
AEB:
Auto:
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (can be
combined with manual exposure compensation)
Applied in One-Shot AF mode with evaluative
metering when focus is achieved
AE lock:
Manual: By AE lock button
Possible
Shooting interval and shot count settable
Bulb exposure time settable
Anti-flicker:
Interval timer:
Bulb timer:
• HDR Shooting
Dynamic range adjustment: Auto, ±1, ±2, ±3
Effects:
Natural, Art standard, Art vivid, Art bold, Art embossed
Auto image align:
Provided
• Multiple Exposures
Shooting method:
Number of multiple
exposures:
Function/control priority, Continuous shooting priority
2 to 9 exposures
Multiple-exposure control: Additive, Average, Bright, Dark
• Shutter
Type:
Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter
Shutter speed:
1/8000 sec. to 30 sec. (total shutter speed range; available
range varies by shooting mode), Bulb, X-sync at 1/200 sec.
• Drive System
Drive mode:
Single shooting, High-speed continuous shooting, Low-
speed continuous shooting, Silent single shooting, Silent
continuous shooting, 10-sec. self-timer/remote control,
2-sec. self-timer/remote control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
491
Specifications
Continuous shooting
speed:
High-speed continuous shooting:
Max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec.
Low-speed continuous shooting:
Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
Silent continuous shooting:
Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
Max. burst
(With full-frame):
JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 31 shots (approx. 510 shots)
RAW: Approx. 12 shots (approx. 14 shots)
RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 12 shots (approx. 12 shots)
* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (ISO
100 and Standard Picture Style) and an 8 GB CF card.
* Figures in parentheses apply to an UDMA mode 7, with
a CF card based on Canon’s testing standards.
• External Speedlite
Compatible Speedlites: EX-series Speedlites
Flash metering:
Flash exposure
compensation:
FE lock:
E-TTL II autoflash
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
Provided
PC terminal:
Flash control:
Provided
Flash function settings, Flash C.Fn settings
• Live View Shooting
Focus method:
Contrast-detection AF system (Face+Tracking,
FlexiZone-Single)
Manual focus (approx. 6x and 16x magnified view
possible for focus check)
Continuous AF:
Provided
Focusing brightness range: EV 0 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Metering mode:
Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering
(approx. 6.4% of Live View screen), Spot metering
(approx. 2.8% of Live View screen), Center-weighted
average metering
Brightness metering
range:
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Silent shooting:
Grid display:
Provided (Mode 1 and 2)
3 types
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
492
Specifications
• Movie Shooting
Recording format:
Movie:
MOV
MPEG-4 AVC / H.264
Variable (average) bit rate
Linear PCM
Audio:
Recording size and
frame rate:
Full HD (1920x1080): 29.97p/25.00p/23.98p
HD (1280x720)
VGA (640x480)
: 59.94p/50.00p
: 29.97p/25.00p
Compression method: ALL-I (For editing/I-only), IPB (Standard)
File size:
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/23.98p)/ALL-I
: Approx. 654 MB/min.
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/23.98p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 225 MB/min.
: Approx. 583 MB/min.
HD (59.94p/50.00p)/ALL-I
HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard) : Approx. 196 MB/min.
VGA (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Standard): Approx. 78 MB/min.
[CF card]
Card requirements
(Writing/reading speed): ALL-I: 30 MB/sec. or faster, IPB: 10 MB/sec. or faster
[SD card]
ALL-I: 20 MB/sec. or faster, IPB: 6 MB/sec. or faster
Focus method:
Contrast-detection AF system (Face+Tracking,
FlexiZone-Single)
Manual focus (approx. 6x and 16x magnified view
possible for focus check)
Movie servo AF:
Possible
Focusing brightness range: EV 0 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Metering mode:
Center-weighted average and Evaluative metering with
the image sensor
* Automatically set by the focus method.
Brightness metering range: EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Exposure control: Autoexposure shooting (Program AE for movie shooting),
Shutter-priority AE, Aperture-priority AE, Manual exposure
Exposure compensation: ±3 stops in 1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments
ISO speed
(Recommended
exposure index)
Scene Intelligent Auto, Tv: Automatically set within ISO
100 - ISO 6400
:
P, Av, B: Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400,
expandable to H (equivalent to ISO 12800)
M: Auto ISO (automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400),
ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set manually (in 1/3- or whole-stop
increments), expandable to H (equivalent to ISO 12800)
Supported
Time code:
Drop frames:
Compatible with 59.94p/29.97p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
493
Specifications
Sound recording:
Built-in monaural microphone, external stereo
microphone terminal provided
Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,
attenuator provided
Grid display:
3 types
Time-lapse movie:
Shooting interval and number of shots settable
Required shooting time period, playback length, and
remaining card capacity viewable
Possible
Still photo shooting:
• LCD Monitor
Type:
TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor
Monitor size and dots: Wide 8.1 cm (3.2-in) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots
Brightness adjustment: Auto (Dark, Standard, Bright), Manual (7 levels)
Electronic level:
Interface languages:
Help display:
Provided
25
Possible
• Playback
Image display format:
Single-image display (without shooting information),
Single-image display (with simple information), Single-
image display (Shooting information displayed: Detailed
information, Lens/histogram, White balance, Picture
Style 1, Picture Style 2, Color space/noise reduction,
Lens aberration correction), Index display (4/9/36/100
images), Two-image display
Highlight alert:
AF point display:
Grid display:
Overexposed highlights blink
Provided
3 types
Magnified view:
Approx. 1.5x-16x, initial magnification and position
settable
Image browsing method: Single image, Jump by 10 or 100 images, By shooting
date, By folder, By movies, By stills, By protected
images, By rating
Image rotation:
Rating:
Provided
Provided
Movie playback:
Enabled (LCD monitor, HDMI)
Built-in speaker
Slide show:
All images, By date, By folder, By movies, By stills, By
protected images, By rating
Possible
Possible
Image protection:
Copying images:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
494
Specifications
• Post-Processing of Images
In-camera RAW image Brightness correction, White balance, Picture Style, Auto
processing:
Lighting Optimizer, High ISO speed noise reduction,
JPEG image-recording quality, Color space, Peripheral
illumination correction, Distortion correction, Chromatic
aberration correction
Resize:
Provided
Cropping:
Provided
• Direct Printing
Compatible printers:
Printable images:
Print ordering:
PictBridge-compatible printers
JPEG and RAW images
DPOF Version 1.1 compliant
• Image Transfer
Transferrable files:
Still photos (JPEG, RAW, RAW+JPEG images), Movies
16
• Custom Functions
Custom Functions:
Custom Quick Control: Provided
My Menu:
Up to 5 screens can be registered
Custom shooting mode: Register under Mode Dial’s C1, C2, or C3
Copyright information: Text entry and inclusion enabled
• Interface
DIGITAL terminal:
SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.0)
Computer communication, direct printing, Wireless File
Transmitter WFT-E7 (Ver. 2), GPS Receiver GP-E2,
Connect Station CS100 connection
HDMI mini OUT terminal: Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible
External microphone IN 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack
terminal:
Remote control terminal: For N3-type remote control units
Wireless remote control: Compatible with Remote Controller RC-6
Eye-Fi card:
Supported
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
495
Specifications
• Power
Battery:
Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6, quantity 1
* AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6.
* With Battery Grip BG-E11 attached, AA/R6 batteries
can be used.
Battery information:
Remaining capacity, Shutter count, Recharge
performance, and Battery registration possible
With viewfinder shooting:
Approx. 700 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
approx. 660 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
With Live View shooting:
Number of possible
shots:
Approx. 220 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
approx. 210 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N.
Total approx. 1 hr. 30 min. at room temperature (23°C/
73°F)
Movie shooting time:
Total approx. 1 hr. 25 min. at low temperatures (0°C/
32°F)
* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N.
• Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 152.0 x 116.4 x 76.4 mm / 5.98 x 4.58 x 3.01 in.
Weight:
Approx. 930 g / 32.80 oz. (Based on CIPA Guidelines)
Approx. 845 g / 29.80 oz. (Body only)
• Operation Environment
Working temperature
range:
0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
Working humidity:
85% or less
• Battery Pack LP-E6N
Type:
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
7.2 V DC
Rated voltage:
Battery capacity:
Working temperature
range:
1865 mAh
0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
Working humidity:
85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 38.4 x 21.0 x 56.8 mm / 1.51 x 0.83 x 2.24 in.
Weight: Approx. 80 g / 2.82 oz. (excluding protective cover)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
496
Specifications
• Battery Charger LC-E6
Compatible battery:
Recharging time:
Rated input:
Rated output:
Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6
Approx. 2 hr. 30 min.
100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
8.4 V DC / 1.2 A
Working temperature range:
Working humidity:
5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F
85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D):
Approx. 69.0 x 33.0 x 93.0 mm / 2.7 x 1.3 x 3.7
in.
Weight:
Approx. 130 g / 4.6 oz.
• Battery Charger LC-E6E
Compatible battery:
Power cord length:
Recharging time:
Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6
Approx. 1 m / 3.3 ft.
Approx. 2 hr. 30 min.
Rated input:
Rated output:
100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
8.4 V DC/1.2 A
Working temperature range:
Working humidity:
5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F
85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D):
Approx. 69.0 x 33.0 x 93.0 mm / 2.7 x 1.3 x 3.7
in.
Weight:
Approx. 125 g / 4.4 oz. (excluding power cord)
All the specifications listed above are common between EOS 5DS and EOS 5DS R.
All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.
Dimensions and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines (except weight for
camera body only).
Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.
If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the
respective lens manufacturer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
497
Trademarks
Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be
used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video
that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a
video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”
* Notice displayed in English as required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
498
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such
as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories
(e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this
warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine
Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable
basis.
Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it
with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or
accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
499
Digital Camera Model DS126521 / DS126611 Systems
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
class B digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
— Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
—
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
The cable with the ferrite core provided with the digital camera must be used
with this equipment in order to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part
15 of the FCC rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise
specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you
could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Canon U.S.A. Inc.
One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A.
Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)
CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)
When connecting to and using a household power outlet, use only AC
Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (rated input: 100-240 V AC 50/60 Hz, rated output:
8.0 V DC). Using anything else can cause fire, overheating, or
electrical shock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
500
USA and Canada only:
The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is
recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on
how to recycle this battery.
For CA, USA only
Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
501
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
502
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
503
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
504
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
505
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
506
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
507
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
508
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
509
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
510
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
511
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
512
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
513
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
514
15
Viewing the CD-ROM Instruction Manuals /
Downloading Images to Your Computer
This chapter explains how to view the Camera
Instruction Manual CD-ROM on your computer,
download images from the camera to your computer,
gives an overview of the software in the EOS DIGITAL
Solution Disk (CD-ROM), and explains how to install the
software on your computer. It also explains how to view
the Software Instruction Manuals.
Camera
EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk
Instruction Manual
(Software/Software Instruction Manuals)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
515
Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM
The Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM contains the
following electronic manuals (PDF files):
Camera Instruction Manual
Explains all the camera functions and procedures, including basic
content.
Quick Reference Guide
Simple and portable guide covering basic function settings, shooting
instructions, and playback instructions.
Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM
To view the instruction manuals (PDF files), Adobe Reader 6.0 or higher
must be installed on your computer. Adobe Reader can be downloaded
free from the Internet. After installing Adobe Reader, follow the
procedure below.
Insert the “CAMERA INSTRUCTION
MANUAL” CD-ROM into your computer.
1
2
Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
With Windows, double-click on the CD-ROM icon in
[(My) Computer]. With Macintosh, double-click on
the CD-ROM icon on the desktop.
The icon displayed will differ depending on your
computer’s operating system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
516
Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM
Double-click the START file.
3
X The screen shown in step 4 will appear.
The icon displayed will differ depending on your
computer’s operating system.
Click your language.
4
Click the instruction manual you want to
5 read.
X The instruction manual will be displayed.
You can save the PDF file to your computer.
To learn how to use Adobe Reader, refer to Adobe Reader’s Help
section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
517
Downloading Images to a Computer
You can use EOS software to download the images in the camera to
your computer. There are two ways to do this.
Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer
1
Use the provided interface cable
2 to connect the camera to your
computer.
Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
When connecting the cable to the
camera, use the cable protector
(p.36). Connect the cable to the
digital terminal with the plug’s
<
> icon facing the back of the
camera.
Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal.
Use EOS Utility to transfer the
3 images.
For details, refer to the EOS Utility
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
518
Downloading Images to a Computer
Downloading Images with a Card Reader
You can use a card reader to download images to your computer.
1
Insert the card into the card
2 reader.
Use Digital Photo Professional to
3 download the images.
For details, refer to the Digital Photo
Professional Instruction Manual
When downloading images from the camera to your computer with a card
reader without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to
your computer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
519
Software Overview
EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk
Various software for EOS DIGITAL cameras are contained
on the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk.
EOS Utility
With the camera connected to a computer, EOS Utility enables you to
transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the computer.
You can also use this software to set various camera settings and shoot
remotely from the computer connected to the camera.
Digital Photo Professional
This software is recommended for users who shoot RAW images. You
can view, edit, and print RAW and JPEG images.
* Some functions differ between the version to be installed on a 64-bit computer
and that to be installed on a 32-bit computer.
Picture Style Editor
You can edit Picture Styles, and create and save original Picture Style
files. This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in
processing images.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
520
Installing the Software
Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install the
software. The software will not be installed correctly.
If there is a previous version of the software already installed on your
computer, follow the procedure below to install the latest version. (The
previous version will be overwritten.)
1
Insert the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk into your computer.
For Macintosh, double-click to open the CD-ROM icon displayed
on the desktop, then double-click on [setup].
2 Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen
instructions to install.
3 Click [Restart] and remove the CD-ROM after the
computer restarts.
When the computer has restarted, the installation is complete.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
521
Software Instruction Manual
Software Instruction Manuals are contained on the EOS
DIGITAL Solution Disk. You can copy and view the
software instruction manual (PDF files) as follows:
1 Insert the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk into your
computer.
2 Close the install screen.
When the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk install screen appears,
close the install screen.
3 Open the CD-ROM.
4 Open the [Manual] folder.
5 Copy the [English] folder to your computer.
Instruction Manual PDFs with the names below are copied.
Windows
Macintosh
EOS Utility
EUx.xW_E_xx
DPPx.xW_E_xx
PSEx.xW_E_xx
EUx.xM_E_xx
DPPx.xM_E_xx
PSEx.xM_E_xx
Digital Photo Professional
Picture Style Editor
6 Double-click the copied PDF file.
Adobe Reader (most recent version recommended) must be
installed on your computer.
Adobe Reader can be downloaded free from the Internet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
522
Index
Autofocus 9 AF
Center-weighted average
metering ....................................... 213
CF card 9 Cards
Custom Controls
(buttons & dials)....................... 413
Flash Custom Function
B
Bracketing
FEB
(Flash exposure bracketing).....251
settings .................................... 253
C
Camera
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
524
Index
Exposure maintained for
D
new aperture ................................ 406
External Speedlite 9 Flash
Dials
F
Downloading images
(to a computer)..............................518
DPOF
FEB
(Flash exposure bracketing) .... 251
(Digital Print Order Format)...........389
E
Exposure compensation with
Auto ISO .......................................211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
525
Index
Shutter synchronization
I
(1st/2nd curtain) .......................251
Focusing 9 AF, Manual Focusing
(MF)
Images
Downloading images
(to a computer) ........................ 518
Jump display
Functions settable by
shooting mode ..............................456
G
H
(image browsing) ..................... 328
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
526
Index
J
M
L
Memory cards 9 Cards
Chromatic aberration
correction..................................189
Peripheral illumination
correction..................................188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
527
Index
Editing out first and last
N
Noise reduction
scenes......................................346
O
P
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
528
Index
S
SD, SDHC, SDXC cards 9 Cards
Sensitivity 9 ISO speed
Q
R
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
529
Index
Silent shooting
U
V
W
T
Z
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
530
MEMO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
531
The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of March 2015. For
information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,
refer to the Canon Web site.
CPX-E140-000
© CANON INC. 2015
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Belkin Microcassette Recorder 25PB082 User Manual
Briggs Stratton Pressure Washer 1418 2 User Manual
Brother Cassette Player PT 1180 User Manual
Bushnell Mixer 78 5456 User Manual
Cadillac Telephone 2015 CRC User Manual
Canon Fax Machine 5258B001 User Manual
Canon Printer S820 User Manual
Casio Calculator 300 PLUS User Manual
Casio Digital Camera EX Z77 User Manual
CDA Refrigerator FW221 User Manual